/[emacs]/emacs/etc/NEWS
ViewVC logotype

Contents of /emacs/etc/NEWS

Parent Directory Parent Directory | Revision Log Revision Log


Revision 1.478.4.26 - (show annotations) (download)
Wed Jan 29 15:50:49 2003 UTC (21 years, 2 months ago) by lektu
Branch: EMACS_21_1_RC
CVS Tags: EMACS_21_3
Branch point for: ttn-vms-21-3-stash
Changes since 1.478.4.25: +8 -8 lines
Fix typos in description of image properties.

1 GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2002-12-08
2 Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 See the end for copying conditions.
4
5 Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
6 For older news, see the file ONEWS
7
8
9 * Installation changes in Emacs 21.3
10
11 ** Support for GNU/Linux on little-endian MIPS and on IBM S390 has
12 been added.
13
14
15 * Changes in Emacs 21.3
16
17 ** The obsolete C mode (c-mode.el) has been removed to avoid problems
18 with Custom.
19
20 ** UTF-16 coding systems are available, encoding the same characters
21 as mule-utf-8. Coding system `utf-16-le-dos' is useful as the value
22 of `selection-coding-system' in MS Windows, allowing you to paste
23 multilingual text from the clipboard. Set it interactively with
24 C-x RET x or in .emacs with `(set-selection-coding-system 'utf-16-le-dos)'.
25
26 ** There is a new language environment for UTF-8 (set up automatically
27 in UTF-8 locales).
28
29 ** Translation tables are available between equivalent characters in
30 different Emacs charsets -- for instance `e with acute' coming from the
31 Latin-1 and Latin-2 charsets. User options `unify-8859-on-encoding-mode'
32 and `unify-8859-on-decoding-mode' respectively turn on translation
33 between ISO 8859 character sets (`unification') on encoding
34 (e.g. writing a file) and decoding (e.g. reading a file). Note that
35 `unify-8859-on-encoding-mode' is useful and safe, but
36 `unify-8859-on-decoding-mode' can cause text to change when you read
37 it and write it out again without edits, so it is not generally advisable.
38 By default `unify-8859-on-encoding-mode' is turned on.
39
40 ** In Emacs running on the X window system, the default value of
41 `selection-coding-system' is now `compound-text-with-extensions'.
42
43 If you want the old behavior, set selection-coding-system to
44 compound-text, which may be significantly more efficient. Using
45 compound-text-with-extensions seems to be necessary only for decoding
46 text from applications under XFree86 4.2, whose behaviour is actually
47 contrary to the compound text specification.
48
49
50 * Installation changes in Emacs 21.2
51
52 ** Support for BSD/OS 5.0 has been added.
53
54 ** Support for AIX 5.1 was added.
55
56
57 * Changes in Emacs 21.2
58
59 ** Emacs now supports compound-text extended segments in X selections.
60
61 X applications can use `extended segments' to encode characters in
62 compound text that belong to character sets which are not part of the
63 list of approved standard encodings for X, e.g. Big5. To paste
64 selections with such characters into Emacs, use the new coding system
65 compound-text-with-extensions as the value of selection-coding-system.
66
67 ** The default values of `tooltip-delay' and `tooltip-hide-delay'
68 were changed.
69
70 ** On terminals whose erase-char is ^H (Backspace), Emacs
71 now uses normal-erase-is-backspace-mode.
72
73 ** When the *scratch* buffer is recreated, its mode is set from
74 initial-major-mode, which normally is lisp-interaction-mode,
75 instead of using default-major-mode.
76
77 ** The new option `Info-scroll-prefer-subnodes' causes Info to behave
78 like the stand-alone Info reader (from the GNU Texinfo package) as far
79 as motion between nodes and their subnodes is concerned. If it is t
80 (the default), Emacs behaves as before when you type SPC in a menu: it
81 visits the subnode pointed to by the first menu entry. If this option
82 is nil, SPC scrolls to the end of the current node, and only then goes
83 to the first menu item, like the stand-alone reader does.
84
85 This change was already in Emacs 21.1, but wasn't advertised in the
86 NEWS.
87
88
89 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 21.2
90
91 ** The meanings of scroll-up-aggressively and scroll-down-aggressively
92 have been interchanged, so that the former now controls scrolling up,
93 and the latter now controls scrolling down.
94
95 ** The variable `compilation-parse-errors-filename-function' can
96 be used to transform filenames found in compilation output.
97
98
99 * Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
100
101 See the INSTALL file for information on installing extra libraries and
102 fonts to take advantage of the new graphical features and extra
103 charsets in this release.
104
105 ** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
106
107 ** Support for LynxOS has been added.
108
109 ** There are new configure options associated with the support for
110 images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
111 to list them.
112
113 ** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
114 support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the
115 maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions. Changes to
116 build on other 64-bit systems should be straightforward modulo any
117 necessary changes to unexec.
118
119 ** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
120 Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
121
122 ** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
123 Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
124
125 ** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
126 the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
127
128 ** This version can be built for the Macintosh, but does not implement
129 all of the new display features described below. The port currently
130 lacks unexec, asynchronous processes, and networking support. See the
131 "Emacs and the Mac OS" appendix in the Emacs manual, for the
132 description of aspects specific to the Mac.
133
134 ** Note that the MS-Windows port does not yet implement various of the
135 new display features described below.
136
137
138 * Changes in Emacs 21.1
139
140 ** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
141
142 The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
143 Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
144 oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
145 of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
146 the text.
147
148 ** Emacs has a new face implementation.
149
150 The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
151 font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
152 height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
153 These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
154 specify a font.
155
156 Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
157 These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
158 under Lisp changes, below.
159
160 ** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
161
162 Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
163 Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
164 the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
165 italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
166 Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
167 attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
168 on terminals.
169
170 The command-line options `-fg COLOR', `-bg COLOR', and `-rv' are now
171 supported on character terminals.
172
173 Emacs automatically remaps all X-style color specifications to one of
174 the colors supported by the terminal. This means you could have the
175 same color customizations that work both on a windowed display and on
176 a TTY or when Emacs is invoked with the -nw option.
177
178 ** New default font is Courier 12pt under X.
179
180 ** Sound support
181
182 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
183 driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
184 supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
185 You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes' to enable
186 sound support.
187
188 ** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
189
190 If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
191 longer than one line, Emacs can resize the minibuffer window unless it
192 is on a frame of its own. You can control resizing and the maximum
193 minibuffer window size by setting the following variables:
194
195 - User option: max-mini-window-height
196
197 Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
198 fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
199 specifies a number of lines.
200
201 Default is 0.25.
202
203 - User option: resize-mini-windows
204
205 How to resize mini-windows. If nil, don't resize. If t, always
206 resize to fit the size of the text. If `grow-only', let mini-windows
207 grow only, until they become empty, at which point they are shrunk
208 again.
209
210 Default is `grow-only'.
211
212 ** LessTif support.
213
214 Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see
215 <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will need version 0.92.26, or later.
216
217 ** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
218
219 When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
220 from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
221 non-nil.
222
223 ** File selection dialog on MS-Windows is supported.
224
225 When a file is visited by clicking File->Open, the MS-Windows version
226 now pops up a standard file selection dialog where you can select a
227 file to visit. File->Save As also pops up that dialog.
228
229 ** Toolkit scroll bars.
230
231 Emacs now uses toolkit scroll bars if available. When configured for
232 LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scroll bar. Otherwise, when
233 configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
234 bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
235 bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
236 Emacs.
237
238 When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
239 Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
240 Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
241 Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
242 define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
243 `s/freebsd.h' as an example.
244
245 Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
246 a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
247 directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
248 different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
249 system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
250 add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
251
252 The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
253 `float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
254 This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
255 imake configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
256 Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
257
258 ** Tool bar support.
259
260 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
261 of how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level
262 changes. Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is
263 displayed and is on by default. The appearance of the bar is improved
264 if Emacs has been built with XPM image support. Otherwise monochrome
265 icons will be used.
266
267 To make the tool bar more useful, we need contributions of extra icons
268 for specific modes (with copyright assignments). Contributions would
269 also be useful to touch up some of the PBM icons manually.
270
271 ** Tooltips.
272
273 Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
274 mouse position. The Lisp package `tooltip' implements them. You can
275 turn them off via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
276
277 Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
278 variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
279 the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
280 tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
281
282 ** Automatic Hscrolling
283
284 Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
285 `automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
286 customized.
287
288 If a window is scrolled horizontally with set-window-hscroll, or
289 scroll-left/scroll-right (C-x <, C-x >), this serves as a lower bound
290 for automatic horizontal scrolling. Automatic scrolling will scroll
291 the text more to the left if necessary, but won't scroll the text more
292 to the right than the column set with set-window-hscroll etc.
293
294 ** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
295 of its own. By default, when a window is selected, the cursor is
296 solid; otherwise, it is hollow. The user-option
297 `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to display the
298 cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is shown, if
299 non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown.
300
301 ** Fringes to the left and right of windows are used to display
302 truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
303 foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
304 customizing face `fringe'.
305
306 ** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default.
307 You can change its appearance by modifying the face `mode-line'.
308 In particular, setting the `:box' attribute to nil turns off the 3D
309 appearance of the mode line. (The 3D appearance makes the mode line
310 occupy more space, and thus might cause the first or the last line of
311 the window to be partially obscured.)
312
313 The variable `mode-line-inverse-video', which was used in older
314 versions of emacs to make the mode-line stand out, is now deprecated.
315 However, setting it to nil will cause the `mode-line' face to be
316 ignored, and mode-lines to be drawn using the default text face.
317
318 ** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
319
320 Different parts of the mode line have been made mouse-sensitive on all
321 systems which support the mouse. Moving the mouse to a
322 mouse-sensitive part in the mode line changes the appearance of the
323 mouse pointer to an arrow, and help about available mouse actions is
324 displayed either in the echo area, or in the tooltip window if you
325 have enabled one.
326
327 Currently, the following actions have been defined:
328
329 - Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line goes to the next buffer.
330
331 - Mouse-3 on the buffer-name goes to the previous buffer.
332
333 - Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
334 `*') toggles the status.
335
336 - Mouse-3 on the mode name displays a minor-mode menu.
337
338 ** Hourglass pointer
339
340 Emacs can optionally display an hourglass pointer under X. You can
341 turn the display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
342
343 ** Blinking cursor
344
345 M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
346 terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
347 and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
348 the group `cursor'.
349
350 ** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
351
352 This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
353 generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
354 See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
355 details.
356
357 Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
358 have to do anything to activate it.
359
360 ** The default binding of the Delete key has changed.
361
362 The new user-option `normal-erase-is-backspace' can be set to
363 determine the effect of the Delete and Backspace function keys.
364
365 On window systems, the default value of this option is chosen
366 according to the keyboard used. If the keyboard has both a Backspace
367 key and a Delete key, and both are mapped to their usual meanings, the
368 option's default value is set to t, so that Backspace can be used to
369 delete backward, and Delete can be used to delete forward. On
370 keyboards which either have only one key (usually labeled DEL), or two
371 keys DEL and BS which produce the same effect, the option's value is
372 set to nil, and these keys delete backward.
373
374 If not running under a window system, setting this option accomplishes
375 a similar effect by mapping C-h, which is usually generated by the
376 Backspace key, to DEL, and by mapping DEL to C-d via
377 `keyboard-translate'. The former functionality of C-h is available on
378 the F1 key. You should probably not use this setting on a text-only
379 terminal if you don't have both Backspace, Delete and F1 keys.
380
381 Programmatically, you can call function normal-erase-is-backspace-mode
382 to toggle the behavior of the Delete and Backspace keys.
383
384 ** The default for user-option `next-line-add-newlines' has been
385 changed to nil, i.e. C-n will no longer add newlines at the end of a
386 buffer by default.
387
388 ** The <home> and <end> keys now move to the beginning or end of the
389 current line, respectively. C-<home> and C-<end> move to the
390 beginning and end of the buffer.
391
392 ** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the
393 recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is
394 signaled.
395
396 ** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
397 file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
398
399 ** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
400 compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
401 this behavior.
402
403 The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs's byte
404 compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
405 Emacs dump core.
406
407 ** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
408
409 When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
410 widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
411 Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
412
413 ** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
414 more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
415 now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
416
417 ** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
418 using that menu.
419
420 ** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
421
422 When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
423 whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
424 defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
425 highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
426 displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
427 whitespace.
428
429 ** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
430 all frames except the selected one.
431
432 ** The new user-option `confirm-kill-emacs' can be customized to
433 let Emacs ask for confirmation before exiting.
434
435 ** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs
436 header-line (which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window),
437 so that it remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled.
438 This behavior may be disabled by customizing the option
439 `Info-use-header-line'.
440
441 ** Polish, Czech, German, and French translations of Emacs' reference card
442 have been added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex', `cs-refcard.tex',
443 `de-refcard.tex' and `fr-refcard.tex'. Postscript files are included.
444
445 ** An `Emacs Survival Guide', etc/survival.tex, is available.
446
447 ** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
448 `dired-ref.tex'. A French translation is available in
449 `fr-drdref.tex'.
450
451 ** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
452 displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
453 menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
454 menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
455
456 ** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable through Customize.
457
458 You can no longer use `M-x customize-variable' to customize `load-path'
459 because it now contains a version-dependent component. You can still
460 use `add-to-list' and `setq' to customize this variable in your
461 `~/.emacs' init file or to modify it from any Lisp program in general.
462
463 ** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
464 point in a pop-up window.
465
466 ** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
467 under XFree86. To enable this, use the `mouse-wheel-mode' command, or
468 customize the variable `mouse-wheel-mode'.
469
470 The variables `mouse-wheel-follow-mouse' and `mouse-wheel-scroll-amount'
471 determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
472
473 ** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
474 sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
475 (On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
476 You can customize `auto-save-list-file-prefix' to change this location.
477
478 ** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
479
480 ** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil
481 to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights.
482
483 ** The new command M-x delete-trailing-whitespace RET will delete the
484 trailing whitespace within the current restriction. You can also add
485 this function to `write-file-hooks' or `local-write-file-hooks'.
486
487 ** When visiting a file with M-x find-file-literally, no newlines will
488 be added to the end of the buffer even if `require-final-newline' is
489 non-nil.
490
491 ** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be
492 set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a
493 file that is already visited under a different name.
494
495 ** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to
496 nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size.
497
498 ** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name
499 and displays information about that.
500
501 ** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
502 expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
503
504 This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
505 determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
506 mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
507 interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
508 regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
509 associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
510
511 ** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
512 suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
513
514 ** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
515 buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
516 contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
517 by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
518 insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
519 the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
520 Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
521
522 ** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
523 been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
524
525 ** The new Custom option `keyboard-coding-system' specifies a coding
526 system for keyboard input.
527
528 ** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
529 coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
530 escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
531 such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
532 recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
533 always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
534 read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
535 (`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
536 RET C-x C-f filename RET.
537
538 ** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
539 environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
540
541 ** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
542 displays all characters in that character set.
543
544 ** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
545 coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
546
547 ** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
548 and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
549 LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
550
551 ** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
552 Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
553 8859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
554 GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet but recent X releases have
555 8859-15. See etc/INSTALL for information on obtaining extra fonts.
556 There are new Leim input methods for Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix (only)
557 and Polish `slash'.
558
559 ** New language environments `Dutch' and `Spanish'.
560 These new environments mainly select appropriate translations
561 of the tutorial.
562
563 ** In Ethiopic language environment, special key bindings for
564 function keys are changed as follows. This is to conform to "Emacs
565 Lisp Coding Convention".
566
567 new command old-binding
568 --- ------- -----------
569 f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-buffer f5
570 S-f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-region f5
571 C-f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-mail-or-marker f5
572
573 f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-buffer unchanged
574 S-f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-region unchanged
575 C-f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-mail-or-marker unchanged
576
577 S-f5 ethio-toggle-punctuation f3
578 S-f6 ethio-modify-vowel f6
579 S-f7 ethio-replace-space f7
580 S-f8 ethio-input-special-character f8
581 S-f9 ethio-replace-space unchanged
582 C-f9 ethio-toggle-space f2
583
584 ** There are new Leim input methods.
585 New input methods "turkish-postfix", "turkish-alt-postfix",
586 "greek-mizuochi", "TeX", and "greek-babel" are now part of the Leim
587 package.
588
589 ** The rule of input method "slovak" is slightly changed. Now the
590 rules for translating "q" and "Q" to "`" (backquote) are deleted, thus
591 typing them inserts "q" and "Q" respectively. Rules for translating
592 "=q", "+q", "=Q", and "+Q" to "`" are also deleted. Now, to input
593 "`", you must type "=q".
594
595 ** If your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO
596 8859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display
597 more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of
598 empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a
599 window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this
600 on.
601
602 ** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
603 on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill,
604 defined in newcomment.el. You can choose different styles of region
605 commenting with the variable `comment-style'.
606
607 ** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
608 `display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
609 indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
610 indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
611
612 ** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
613 on the display using several methods
614
615 - By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
616 a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
617 be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
618
619 - By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
620 equivalent to specifying the frame parameter.
621
622 - By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
623
624 - By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
625 the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
626
627 ** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
628 an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
629 command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
630 does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
631
632 ** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
633 `make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
634 typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
635
636 ** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
637 characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
638
639 ** New X resources recognized
640
641 *** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
642 whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
643 is useful for debugging X problems.
644
645 Example:
646
647 emacs.synchronous: true
648
649 *** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
650 visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
651 the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
652 and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
653 visual class names are
654
655 TrueColor
656 PseudoColor
657 DirectColor
658 StaticColor
659 GrayScale
660 StaticGray
661
662 Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
663 `pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
664 meaning.
665
666 The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
667 supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
668 `visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
669 visual.
670
671 Example:
672
673 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
674
675 *** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
676 specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
677 default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
678 resource values are `true' or `on'.
679
680 Example:
681
682 emacs.privateColormap: true
683
684 ** Faces and frame parameters.
685
686 There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
687 Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
688 `scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
689 `scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
690 sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
691 for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
692 parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
693
694 Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
695 `default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
696 `foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
697 `default' face and vice versa.
698
699 ** New face `menu'.
700
701 The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
702
703 ** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
704
705 The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
706 colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
707 correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
708 the screen gamma of a frame's display.
709
710 PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
711 in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
712 color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
713
714 The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
715 `ScreenGamma'.
716
717 ** Tabs and variable-width text.
718
719 Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
720 defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
721 independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
722 Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
723
724 ** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
725
726 *** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
727
728 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
729
730 The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
731 LessTif/Motif one.
732
733 *** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
734 LessTif and Motif.
735
736 ** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
737
738 As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
739 drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
740 `x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
741
742 ** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
743 bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi and Less).
744
745 This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
746 `indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
747 variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
748
749 ** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
750
751 When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
752 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggressively' is a
753 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
754 fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
755
756 When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
757 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggressively' is a
758 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
759 fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
760
761 ** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
762 M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
763 M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
764 buffers.
765
766 ** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
767
768 ** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
769 abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
770 `directory-abbrev-alist'.
771
772 ** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
773 the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
774 forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
775 value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
776 users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
777 even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
778
779 The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
780
781 ** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
782 notably at the end of lines.
783
784 All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
785 spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
786
787 ** The function `replace-rectangle' is an alias for `string-rectangle'.
788
789 ** The new command M-x string-insert-rectangle is like `string-rectangle',
790 but inserts text instead of replacing it.
791
792 ** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
793 query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
794 after each match to get the replacement text.
795
796 ** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
797 you edit the replacement string.
798
799 ** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB'
800 (if you load the library `mailabbrev'), lets you complete mail aliases
801 in the text, analogous to lisp-complete-symbol.
802
803 ** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
804
805 ** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
806 to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
807
808 ** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
809 the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
810 MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
811 displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
812
813 --
814 ** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
815 read mail from the menu etc.
816
817 ** The environment variable `EMACSLOCKDIR' is no longer used on MS-Windows.
818 This environment variable was used when creating lock files. Emacs on
819 MS-Windows does not use this variable anymore. This change was made
820 before Emacs 21.1, but wasn't documented until now.
821
822 ** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
823 MS-DOS version of Emacs.
824
825 ** The new command `msdos-set-mouse-buttons' forces the MS-DOS version
826 of Emacs to behave as if the mouse had a specified number of buttons.
827 This comes handy with mice that don't report their number of buttons
828 correctly. One example is the wheeled mice, which report 3 buttons,
829 but clicks on the middle button are not passed to the MS-DOS version
830 of Emacs.
831
832 ** Customize changes
833
834 *** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
835 `State' menu to add comments, or give a prefix argument to
836 M-x customize-set-variable or M-x customize-set-value. Note that
837 customization comments will cause the customizations to fail in
838 earlier versions of Emacs.
839
840 *** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
841 Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
842 default).
843
844 *** If Emacs was invoked with the `-q' or `--no-init-file' options, it
845 does not allow you to save customizations in your `~/.emacs' init
846 file. This is because saving customizations from such a session would
847 wipe out all the other customizationss you might have on your init
848 file.
849
850 ** If Emacs was invoked with the `-q' or `--no-init-file' options, it
851 does not save disabled and enabled commands for future sessions, to
852 avoid overwriting existing customizations of this kind that are
853 already in your init file.
854
855 ** New features in evaluation commands
856
857 *** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
858 modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
859 print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the new
860 customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
861 eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
862
863 The default values for the first two of these variables are 12 and 4
864 respectively, which means that `eval-expression' now prints at most
865 the first 12 members of a list and at most 4 nesting levels deep (if
866 the list is longer or deeper than that, an ellipsis `...' is
867 printed).
868
869 <RET> or <mouse-2> on the printed text toggles between an abbreviated
870 printed representation and an unabbreviated one.
871
872 The default value of eval-expression-debug-on-error is t, so any error
873 during evaluation produces a backtrace.
874
875 *** The function `eval-defun' (C-M-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
876 code when called with a prefix argument.
877
878 ** CC mode changes.
879
880 Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
881 current user setups (although it's believed that these
882 incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
883 However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
884 back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
885 compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
886 release.
887
888 *** The hardcoded switch to "java" style in Java mode is gone.
889 CC Mode used to automatically set the style to "java" when Java mode
890 is entered. This has now been removed since it caused too much
891 confusion.
892
893 However, to keep backward compatibility to a certain extent, the
894 default value for c-default-style now specifies the "java" style for
895 java-mode, but "gnu" for all other modes (as before). So you won't
896 notice the change if you haven't touched that variable.
897
898 *** New cleanups, space-before-funcall and compact-empty-funcall.
899 Two new cleanups have been added to c-cleanup-list:
900
901 space-before-funcall causes a space to be inserted before the opening
902 parenthesis of a function call, which gives the style "foo (bar)".
903
904 compact-empty-funcall causes any space before a function call opening
905 parenthesis to be removed if there are no arguments to the function.
906 It's typically useful together with space-before-funcall to get the
907 style "foo (bar)" and "foo()".
908
909 *** Some keywords now automatically trigger reindentation.
910 Keywords like "else", "while", "catch" and "finally" have been made
911 "electric" to make them reindent automatically when they continue an
912 earlier statement. An example:
913
914 for (i = 0; i < 17; i++)
915 if (a[i])
916 res += a[i]->offset;
917 else
918
919 Here, the "else" should be indented like the preceding "if", since it
920 continues that statement. CC Mode will automatically reindent it after
921 the "else" has been typed in full, since it's not until then it's
922 possible to decide whether it's a new statement or a continuation of
923 the preceding "if".
924
925 CC Mode uses Abbrev mode to achieve this, which is therefore turned on
926 by default.
927
928 *** M-a and M-e now moves by sentence in multiline strings.
929 Previously these two keys only moved by sentence in comments, which
930 meant that sentence movement didn't work in strings containing
931 documentation or other natural language text.
932
933 The reason it's only activated in multiline strings (i.e. strings that
934 contain a newline, even when escaped by a '\') is to avoid stopping in
935 the short strings that often reside inside statements. Multiline
936 strings almost always contain text in a natural language, as opposed
937 to other strings that typically contain format specifications,
938 commands, etc. Also, it's not that bothersome that M-a and M-e misses
939 sentences in single line strings, since they're short anyway.
940
941 *** Support for autodoc comments in Pike mode.
942 Autodoc comments for Pike are used to extract documentation from the
943 source, like Javadoc in Java. Pike mode now recognize this markup in
944 comment prefixes and paragraph starts.
945
946 *** The comment prefix regexps on c-comment-prefix may be mode specific.
947 When c-comment-prefix is an association list, it specifies the comment
948 line prefix on a per-mode basis, like c-default-style does. This
949 change came about to support the special autodoc comment prefix in
950 Pike mode only.
951
952 *** Better handling of syntactic errors.
953 The recovery after unbalanced parens earlier in the buffer has been
954 improved; CC Mode now reports them by dinging and giving a message
955 stating the offending line, but still recovers and indent the
956 following lines in a sane way (most of the time). An "else" with no
957 matching "if" is handled similarly. If an error is discovered while
958 indenting a region, the whole region is still indented and the error
959 is reported afterwards.
960
961 *** Lineup functions may now return absolute columns.
962 A lineup function can give an absolute column to indent the line to by
963 returning a vector with the desired column as the first element.
964
965 *** More robust and warning-free byte compilation.
966 Although this is strictly not a user visible change (well, depending
967 on the view of a user), it's still worth mentioning that CC Mode now
968 can be compiled in the standard ways without causing trouble. Some
969 code have also been moved between the subpackages to enhance the
970 modularity somewhat. Thanks to Martin Buchholz for doing the
971 groundwork.
972
973 *** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
974 This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
975 of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
976 non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
977 want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
978 have to bother.
979
980 Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
981 situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
982 and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
983 If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
984 the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
985 by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
986
987 *** New initialization procedure for the style system.
988 When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
989 variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
990 take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
991 is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
992 settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
993 possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
994 Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
995
996 By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
997 special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
998 the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
999 of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
1000 above.
1001
1002 Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
1003 when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
1004 function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
1005 call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
1006 then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
1007 values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
1008 only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
1009 function documentation for more info.
1010
1011 The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
1012 especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
1013 with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
1014 intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
1015 such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
1016 is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
1017 configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
1018 global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
1019
1020 (Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
1021
1022 **** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
1023 This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
1024
1025 This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
1026 variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
1027 completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
1028 the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
1029 empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
1030 style system.
1031
1032 **** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
1033 In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
1034 c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
1035 as far as possible.
1036
1037 *** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
1038 CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
1039 surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
1040 chapter about this in the manual.
1041
1042 **** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
1043 The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
1044 recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
1045 primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
1046 adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
1047
1048 **** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
1049 This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
1050 c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
1051
1052 **** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
1053 This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
1054
1055 It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
1056 Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
1057 A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
1058 inside CC Mode.
1059
1060 Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
1061 causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
1062 the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
1063 available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
1064 cc-mode/).
1065
1066 **** The variables `c-hanging-comment-starter-p' and
1067 `c-hanging-comment-ender-p', which controlled how comment starters and
1068 enders were filled, are not used anymore. The new version of the
1069 function `c-fill-paragraph' keeps the comment starters and enders as
1070 they were before the filling.
1071
1072 **** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
1073 The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
1074 specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
1075 literals.
1076
1077 **** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
1078 It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
1079 prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
1080 you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
1081 this function.
1082
1083 *** Fixes to IDL mode.
1084 It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
1085 to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
1086 struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
1087 Thanks to Eric Eide.
1088
1089 *** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
1090 It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
1091 opening braces hangs and when they don't.
1092
1093 **** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
1094
1095 *** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
1096 See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
1097 better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
1098 and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
1099
1100 *** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
1101 previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
1102 the column specified by comment-column.
1103
1104 *** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
1105 In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
1106 is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
1107 prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
1108 contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
1109 don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
1110
1111 *** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
1112 instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
1113 arguments.
1114
1115 *** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
1116
1117 *** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
1118 c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
1119 c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
1120 variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
1121 Provan).
1122
1123 *** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
1124
1125 ** Dired changes
1126
1127 *** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
1128 command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
1129 is, delete only empty directories.
1130
1131 *** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
1132 command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
1133 copy directories recursively.
1134
1135 *** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
1136 in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
1137 the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
1138
1139 *** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
1140 replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
1141 directory.
1142
1143 *** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `y') shows
1144 a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
1145 This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
1146 will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
1147 accurate or inaccurate as it is.
1148
1149 *** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
1150 from ls switches.
1151
1152 *** Dired commands that prompt for a destination file now allow the use
1153 of the `M-n' command in the minibuffer to insert the source filename,
1154 which the user can then edit. This only works if there is a single
1155 source file, not when operating on multiple marked files.
1156
1157 ** Gnus changes.
1158
1159 The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in
1160 four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment,
1161 internationalization and mail-fetching.
1162
1163 *** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the
1164 many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone.
1165
1166 If you used procmail like in
1167
1168 (setq nnmail-use-procmail t)
1169 (setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail)
1170 (setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/")
1171 (setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in")
1172
1173 this now has changed to
1174
1175 (setq mail-sources
1176 '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/"
1177 :suffix ".in")))
1178
1179 More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods ->
1180 Getting Mail -> Mail Sources
1181
1182 *** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of
1183 Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details.
1184 Separate MIME packages like RMIME, mime-compose etc., will probably no
1185 longer work; remove them and use the native facilities.
1186
1187 The FLIM/SEMI package still works with Emacs 21, but if you want to
1188 use the native facilities, you must remove any mailcap.el[c] that was
1189 installed by FLIM/SEMI version 1.13 or earlier.
1190
1191 *** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many
1192 parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables. There
1193 are built-in facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is
1194 now just a compatibility layer.
1195
1196 *** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in
1197 Gnus facilities.
1198
1199 *** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be
1200 called to position point.
1201
1202 *** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in
1203 summary buffers and NOV files.
1204
1205 *** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number
1206 of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added.
1207
1208 *** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a
1209 subtly different manner.
1210
1211 *** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive
1212 and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with
1213 ever-changing layouts.
1214
1215 *** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap.
1216
1217 *** There is image support of various kinds and some sound support.
1218
1219 ** Changes in Texinfo mode.
1220
1221 *** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
1222 macros
1223
1224 Key binding Macro
1225 -------------------------
1226 C-c C-c C-s @strong
1227 C-c C-c C-e @emph
1228 C-c C-c u @uref
1229 C-c C-c q @quotation
1230 C-c C-c m @email
1231 C-c C-o @<block> ... @end <block>
1232 M-RET @item
1233
1234 *** The " key now inserts either " or `` or '' depending on context.
1235
1236 ** Changes in Outline mode.
1237
1238 There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
1239 `outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
1240 the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
1241
1242 ** Changes to Emacs Server
1243
1244 *** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
1245 with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
1246 are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
1247 Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
1248 buffers to kill, as before.
1249
1250 Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
1251 i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
1252 this way.
1253
1254 ** Both emacsclient and Emacs itself now accept command line options
1255 of the form +LINE:COLUMN in addition to +LINE.
1256
1257 ** Changes to Show Paren mode.
1258
1259 *** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
1260 The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
1261 use. Default is 1000.
1262
1263 ** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
1264 groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
1265
1266 ** Changes to hideshow.el
1267
1268 *** Generalized block selection and traversal
1269
1270 A block is now recognized by its start and end regexps (both strings),
1271 and an integer specifying which sub-expression in the start regexp
1272 serves as the place where a `forward-sexp'-like function can operate.
1273 See the documentation of variable `hs-special-modes-alist'.
1274
1275 *** During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active,
1276 hidden blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' can
1277 be used in the mode line format to show the line at the beginning of
1278 the open block.
1279
1280 *** User option `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' specifies a
1281 function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead of
1282 the normal block-hiding function.
1283
1284 *** The command `hs-show-region' has been removed.
1285
1286 *** The key bindings have changed to fit the Emacs conventions,
1287 roughly imitating those of Outline minor mode. Notably, the prefix
1288 for all bindings is now `C-c @'. For details, see the documentation
1289 for `hs-minor-mode'.
1290
1291 *** The variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' has been removed, and
1292 hideshow.el now always behaves as if this variable were set to t.
1293
1294 ** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
1295
1296 *** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes
1297 an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
1298 log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
1299
1300 **** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the
1301 current buffer.
1302
1303 *** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries
1304 in a log file.
1305
1306 *** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log
1307 entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
1308 Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
1309 version number is performed based on regular expressions from
1310 `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be customized.
1311 Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
1312
1313 *** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock highlighting.
1314
1315 ** Changes to cmuscheme
1316
1317 *** The user-option `scheme-program-name' has been renamed
1318 `cmuscheme-program-name' due to conflicts with xscheme.el.
1319
1320 ** Changes in Font Lock
1321
1322 *** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
1323 font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major mode.
1324
1325 *** Multi-line patterns are now supported. Modes using this, should
1326 set font-lock-multiline to t in their font-lock-defaults.
1327
1328 *** `font-lock-syntactic-face-function' allows major-modes to choose
1329 the face used for each string/comment.
1330
1331 *** A new standard face `font-lock-doc-face'.
1332 Meant for Lisp docstrings, Javadoc comments and other "documentation in code".
1333
1334 ** Changes to Shell mode
1335
1336 *** The `shell' command now accepts an optional argument to specify the buffer
1337 to use, which defaults to "*shell*". When used interactively, a
1338 non-default buffer may be specified by giving the `shell' command a
1339 prefix argument (causing it to prompt for the buffer name).
1340
1341 ** Comint (subshell) changes
1342
1343 These changes generally affect all modes derived from comint mode, which
1344 include shell-mode, gdb-mode, scheme-interaction-mode, etc.
1345
1346 *** Comint now by default interprets some carriage-control characters.
1347 Comint now removes CRs from CR LF sequences, and treats single CRs and
1348 BSs in the output in a way similar to a terminal (by deleting to the
1349 beginning of the line, or deleting the previous character,
1350 respectively). This is achieved by adding `comint-carriage-motion' to
1351 the `comint-output-filter-functions' hook by default.
1352
1353 *** By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp'
1354 to distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which
1355 parts of the text were output by the process, and which entered by the
1356 user, and attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use
1357 this information. Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line,
1358 respect field boundaries in a fairly natural manner. To disable this
1359 feature, and use the old behavior, customize the user option
1360 `comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields'.
1361
1362 *** Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
1363 and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
1364
1365 *** The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
1366 buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
1367 buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
1368
1369 The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
1370 M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
1371 the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
1372
1373 *** Packages based on comint now highlight user input and program prompts,
1374 and support choosing previous input with mouse-2. To control these features,
1375 see the user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
1376
1377 *** The new command `comint-write-output' (usually bound to `C-c C-s')
1378 saves the output from the most recent command to a file. With a prefix
1379 argument, it appends to the file.
1380
1381 *** The command `comint-kill-output' has been renamed `comint-delete-output'
1382 (usually bound to `C-c C-o'); the old name is aliased to it for
1383 compatibility.
1384
1385 *** The new function `comint-add-to-input-history' adds commands to the input
1386 ring (history).
1387
1388 *** The new variable `comint-input-history-ignore' is a regexp for
1389 identifying history lines that should be ignored, like tcsh time-stamp
1390 strings, starting with a `#'. The default value of this variable is "^#".
1391
1392 ** Changes to Rmail mode
1393
1394 *** The new user-option rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
1395 set to fine tune the identification of the correspondent when
1396 receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
1397 recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
1398 `user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
1399 as correspondent.
1400
1401 Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
1402 mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
1403 regexp matching your mail addresses.
1404
1405 *** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
1406 to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
1407 Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
1408 with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
1409 for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
1410
1411 *** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
1412 like `j'.
1413
1414 *** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
1415 specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
1416 digest message.
1417
1418 *** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
1419 in which folder to put messages automatically.
1420
1421 *** The new function `rmail-redecode-body' allows to fix a message
1422 with non-ASCII characters if Emacs happens to decode it incorrectly
1423 due to missing or malformed "charset=" header.
1424
1425 ** The new user-option `mail-envelope-from' can be used to specify
1426 an envelope-from address different from user-mail-address.
1427
1428 ** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
1429 use the -f option when sending mail.
1430
1431 ** The Rmail command `o' (`rmail-output-to-rmail-file') now writes the
1432 current message in the internal `emacs-mule' encoding, rather than in
1433 the encoding taken from the variable `buffer-file-coding-system'.
1434 This allows to save messages whose characters cannot be safely encoded
1435 by the buffer's coding system, and makes sure the message will be
1436 displayed correctly when you later visit the target Rmail file.
1437
1438 If you want your Rmail files be encoded in a specific coding system
1439 other than `emacs-mule', you can customize the variable
1440 `rmail-file-coding-system' to set its value to that coding system.
1441
1442 ** Changes to TeX mode
1443
1444 *** The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
1445 `latex-mode'.
1446
1447 *** latex-mode now has a simple indentation algorithm.
1448
1449 *** M-f and M-p jump around \begin...\end pairs.
1450
1451 *** Added support for outline-minor-mode.
1452
1453 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
1454
1455 *** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
1456 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
1457 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
1458 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
1459 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
1460 can be edited from that buffer.
1461
1462 *** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
1463 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
1464 `A' to use all marked entries).
1465
1466 *** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
1467 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
1468
1469 *** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
1470 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
1471 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
1472 been cited.
1473
1474 ** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
1475 The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
1476 semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
1477 in column 1 are always made leaves.
1478
1479 ** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
1480 has the following new features:
1481
1482 *** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
1483 may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
1484 to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
1485 time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
1486
1487 *** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
1488 feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
1489 file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
1490 compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
1491 pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
1492 defaults to 1.
1493
1494 ** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
1495 file names.
1496
1497 ** Ispell changes
1498
1499 *** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
1500 transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
1501 spell-checks the current buffer.
1502
1503 *** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
1504 added.
1505
1506 *** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
1507 correction is made and re-checked.
1508
1509 *** An Italian, Portuguese, and Slovak dictionary definition has been added.
1510
1511 *** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
1512 cases.
1513
1514 *** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
1515 on syntax errors.
1516
1517 *** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
1518 end of the buffer.
1519
1520 *** Spell checking now works in the MS-DOS version of Emacs.
1521
1522 ** Makefile mode changes
1523
1524 *** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
1525
1526 *** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
1527 Fontlock mode is active.
1528
1529 ** Isearch changes
1530
1531 *** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
1532 so that searches can be resumed.
1533
1534 *** In Isearch mode, C-M-s and C-M-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
1535 respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
1536 that started the search.
1537
1538 *** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
1539 selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
1540
1541 *** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
1542
1543 Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
1544 `isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
1545 search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
1546 before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
1547 highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
1548 `secondary-selection'.
1549
1550 The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
1551 will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
1552 Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
1553 using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
1554 usual snappy response.
1555
1556 If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
1557 matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
1558 set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
1559 isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
1560
1561 ** VC Changes
1562
1563 VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it
1564 easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp
1565 Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism
1566 to enable and disable support for particular version systems has
1567 changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable
1568 `vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of symbols that identify
1569 version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file,
1570 each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the
1571 file is registered in that backend.
1572
1573 When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed
1574 backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the
1575 directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for
1576 master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then
1577 the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen.
1578 As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete.
1579
1580 The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC
1581 still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for
1582 RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables
1583 vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS
1584 where it doesn't make sense.)
1585
1586 The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also
1587 obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude
1588 `CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now.
1589
1590 *** General Changes
1591
1592 The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding
1593 checks are always done now.
1594
1595 VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control
1596 operations.
1597
1598 `vc-diff' output is now displayed in `diff-mode'.
1599 `vc-print-log' uses `log-view-mode'.
1600 `vc-log-mode' (used for *VC-Log*) has been replaced by `log-edit-mode'.
1601
1602 The command C-x v m (vc-merge) now accepts an empty argument as the
1603 first revision number. This means that any recent changes on the
1604 current branch should be picked up from the repository and merged into
1605 the working file (``merge news'').
1606
1607 The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1608 (vc-retrieve-snapshot) now ask for a directory name from which to work
1609 downwards.
1610
1611 *** Multiple Backends
1612
1613 VC now lets you register files in more than one backend. This is
1614 useful, for example, if you are working with a slow remote CVS
1615 repository. You can then use RCS for local editing, and occasionally
1616 commit your changes back to CVS, or pick up changes from CVS into your
1617 local RCS archives.
1618
1619 To make this work, the ``more local'' backend (RCS in our example)
1620 should come first in `vc-handled-backends', and the ``more remote''
1621 backend (CVS) should come later. (The default value of
1622 `vc-handled-backends' already has it that way.)
1623
1624 You can then commit changes to another backend (say, RCS), by typing
1625 C-u C-x v v RCS RET (i.e. vc-next-action now accepts a backend name as
1626 a revision number). VC registers the file in the more local backend
1627 if that hasn't already happened, and commits to a branch based on the
1628 current revision number from the more remote backend.
1629
1630 If a file is registered in multiple backends, you can switch to
1631 another one using C-x v b (vc-switch-backend). This does not change
1632 any files, it only changes VC's perspective on the file. Use this to
1633 pick up changes from CVS while working under RCS locally.
1634
1635 After you are done with your local RCS editing, you can commit your
1636 changes back to CVS using C-u C-x v v CVS RET. In this case, the
1637 local RCS archive is removed after the commit, and the log entry
1638 buffer is initialized to contain the entire RCS change log of the file.
1639
1640 *** Changes for CVS
1641
1642 There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the
1643 default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in
1644 remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined
1645 by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a
1646 regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts
1647 that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC
1648 queries the repository just as often as it does for local files.
1649
1650 If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, then VC also makes local backups of
1651 repository versions. This means that ordinary diffs (C-x v =) and
1652 revert operations (C-x v u) can be done completely locally, without
1653 any repository interactions at all. The name of a local version
1654 backup of FILE is FILE.~REV.~, where REV is the repository version
1655 number. This format is similar to that used by C-x v ~
1656 (vc-version-other-window), except for the trailing dot. As a matter
1657 of fact, the two features can each use the files created by the other,
1658 the only difference being that files with a trailing `.' are deleted
1659 automatically after commit. (This feature doesn't work on MS-DOS,
1660 since DOS disallows more than a single dot in the trunk of a file
1661 name.)
1662
1663 If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the
1664 repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit.
1665 If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to
1666 commit, you can either use C-x v m RET to perform an update on the
1667 current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an
1668 entire directory tree.
1669
1670 The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call
1671 "cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option
1672 is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are
1673 "watched" by other developers.)
1674
1675 The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1676 (vc-retrieve-snapshot) are now also implemented for CVS. If you give
1677 an empty snapshot name to the latter, that performs a `cvs update',
1678 starting at the given directory.
1679
1680 *** Lisp Changes in VC
1681
1682 VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now
1683 add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a
1684 library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and
1685 then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for
1686 a version system named SYS, you write a library named vc-sys.el, which
1687 provides a number of functions vc-sys-... (see commentary at the top
1688 of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library,
1689 you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the symbol
1690 `SYS' to the list `vc-handled-backends'.
1691
1692 ** The customizable EDT emulation package now supports the EDT
1693 SUBS command and EDT scroll margins. It also works with more
1694 terminal/keyboard configurations and it now works under XEmacs.
1695 See etc/edt-user.doc for more information.
1696
1697 ** New modes and packages
1698
1699 *** The new global minor mode `minibuffer-electric-default-mode'
1700 automatically hides the `(default ...)' part of minibuffer prompts when
1701 the default is not applicable.
1702
1703 *** Artist is an Emacs lisp package that allows you to draw lines,
1704 rectangles and ellipses by using your mouse and/or keyboard. The
1705 shapes are made up with the ascii characters |, -, / and \.
1706
1707 Features are:
1708
1709 - Intersecting: When a `|' intersects with a `-', a `+' is
1710 drawn, like this: | \ /
1711 --+-- X
1712 | / \
1713
1714 - Rubber-banding: When drawing lines you can interactively see the
1715 result while holding the mouse button down and moving the mouse. If
1716 your machine is not fast enough (a 386 is a bit too slow, but a
1717 pentium is well enough), you can turn this feature off. You will
1718 then see 1's and 2's which mark the 1st and 2nd endpoint of the line
1719 you are drawing.
1720
1721 - Arrows: After having drawn a (straight) line or a (straight)
1722 poly-line, you can set arrows on the line-ends by typing < or >.
1723
1724 - Flood-filling: You can fill any area with a certain character by
1725 flood-filling.
1726
1727 - Cut copy and paste: You can cut, copy and paste rectangular
1728 regions. Artist also interfaces with the rect package (this can be
1729 turned off if it causes you any trouble) so anything you cut in
1730 artist can be yanked with C-x r y and vice versa.
1731
1732 - Drawing with keys: Everything you can do with the mouse, you can
1733 also do without the mouse.
1734
1735 - Aspect-ratio: You can set the variable artist-aspect-ratio to
1736 reflect the height-width ratio for the font you are using. Squares
1737 and circles are then drawn square/round. Note, that once your
1738 ascii-file is shown with font with a different height-width ratio,
1739 the squares won't be square and the circles won't be round.
1740
1741 - Drawing operations: The following drawing operations are implemented:
1742
1743 lines straight-lines
1744 rectangles squares
1745 poly-lines straight poly-lines
1746 ellipses circles
1747 text (see-thru) text (overwrite)
1748 spray-can setting size for spraying
1749 vaporize line vaporize lines
1750 erase characters erase rectangles
1751
1752 Straight lines are lines that go horizontally, vertically or
1753 diagonally. Plain lines go in any direction. The operations in
1754 the right column are accessed by holding down the shift key while
1755 drawing.
1756
1757 It is possible to vaporize (erase) entire lines and connected lines
1758 (rectangles for example) as long as the lines being vaporized are
1759 straight and connected at their endpoints. Vaporizing is inspired
1760 by the drawrect package by Jari Aalto <jari.aalto@poboxes.com>.
1761
1762 - Picture mode compatibility: Artist is picture mode compatible (this
1763 can be turned off).
1764
1765 *** The new package Eshell is an operating system command shell
1766 implemented entirely in Emacs Lisp. Use `M-x eshell' to invoke it.
1767 It functions similarly to bash and zsh, and allows running of Lisp
1768 functions and external commands using the same syntax. It supports
1769 history lists, aliases, extended globbing, smart scrolling, etc. It
1770 will work on any platform Emacs has been ported to. And since most of
1771 the basic commands -- ls, rm, mv, cp, ln, du, cat, etc. -- have been
1772 rewritten in Lisp, it offers an operating-system independent shell,
1773 all within the scope of your Emacs process.
1774
1775 *** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
1776 intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
1777 typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
1778 on certain projects.
1779
1780 *** The new package hi-lock.el provides commands to highlight matches
1781 of interactively entered regexps. For example,
1782
1783 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
1784
1785 will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
1786 face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
1787 typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
1788 Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
1789 appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
1790 current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
1791 corresponding file is read. There are commands to highlight matches
1792 to phrases and to highlight entire lines containing a match.
1793
1794 *** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
1795 Emacs is idle.
1796
1797 *** The new package tildify.el allows to add hard spaces or other text
1798 fragments in accordance with the current major mode.
1799
1800 *** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
1801 parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
1802
1803 *** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1804 package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1805 be more robust while offering the same functionality.
1806 `comment-region' now doesn't always comment a-line-at-a-time, but only
1807 comments the region, breaking the line at point if necessary.
1808
1809 *** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1810 facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1811 separate Texinfo file.
1812
1813 *** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
1814 by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1815 provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
1816 `log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
1817 enter check-in log messages.
1818
1819 *** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1820 without invoking external programs.
1821
1822 The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1823 and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1824 `manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1825 is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
1826 Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
1827
1828 The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1829 page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1830
1831 *** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1832 authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1833
1834 The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1835 the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1836 the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1837 Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1838 even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1839 single step.
1840
1841 On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1842 matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1843 probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1844 contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1845
1846 *** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1847 unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1848 actually modifying content of a buffer.
1849
1850 *** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1851 PostScript.
1852
1853 Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1854
1855 The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1856
1857 ; comment (until end of line)
1858 A non-terminal
1859 "C" terminal
1860 ?C? special
1861 $A default non-terminal
1862 $"C" default terminal
1863 $?C? default special
1864 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1865 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1866 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1867 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1868 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1869 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1870 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1871 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1872 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1873 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1874 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1875 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1876 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1877 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1878 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1879
1880 Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1881
1882 *** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1883 align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1884 determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1885 example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1886 equal signs of assignments.
1887
1888 *** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1889 paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1890
1891 *** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1892 list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1893 buffer menu with this package. See the Custom group `bs'.
1894
1895 *** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1896
1897 *** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1898 replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1899 is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1900 and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1901 not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1902 which answers different needs.
1903
1904 *** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1905 suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1906 expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1907 course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1908 reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1909 to be enabled.
1910
1911 *** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1912 containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1913
1914 *** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1915
1916 *** hl-line.el provides `hl-line-mode', a minor mode to highlight the
1917 current line in the current buffer. It also provides
1918 `global-hl-line-mode' to provide the same behaviour in all buffers.
1919
1920 *** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1921
1922 Please note: if `ansi-color-for-comint-mode' and
1923 `global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will
1924 disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to
1925 `comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This
1926 displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground
1927 and background colors.
1928
1929 *** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1930 Pascal) language.
1931
1932 *** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1933 the text at point.
1934
1935 *** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1936
1937 *** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1938
1939 *** whitespace.el is a package for warning about and cleaning bogus
1940 whitespace in a file.
1941
1942 *** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1943 files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1944 (very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1945 interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1946 often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1947 uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1948 codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1949
1950 *** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1951
1952 Here is an example of columns:
1953
1954 horse apple bus
1955 dog pineapple car EXTRA
1956 porcupine strawberry airplane
1957
1958 Doing the following settings:
1959
1960 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1961 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1962 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1963 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1964
1965
1966 Selecting the lines above and typing:
1967
1968 M-x delimit-columns-region
1969
1970 It results:
1971
1972 [ horse , apple , bus , ]
1973 [ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1974 [ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1975
1976 delim-col has the following options:
1977
1978 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1979 before all columns.
1980
1981 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1982 between each column.
1983
1984 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1985 after all columns.
1986
1987 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1988 each column.
1989
1990 delim-col has the following commands:
1991
1992 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1993 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1994
1995 *** Recentf mode maintains a menu for visiting files that were
1996 operated on recently. User option recentf-menu-filter specifies a
1997 menu filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the
1998 recent file list can be displayed:
1999
2000 - organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
2001 - sorted by file paths, file names, ascending or descending.
2002 - showing paths relative to the current default-directory
2003
2004 The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
2005 dynamically change the menu appearance.
2006
2007 *** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
2008 text.
2009
2010 *** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
2011 of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
2012 specific to Message mode.
2013
2014 *** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
2015 viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
2016 with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
2017
2018 *** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
2019 interface to access directory servers using different directory
2020 protocols. It has a separate manual.
2021
2022 *** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
2023 for Autoconf, selected automatically.
2024
2025 *** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
2026
2027 *** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
2028 minibuffer with completion.
2029
2030 *** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
2031 with the diary features.
2032
2033 *** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
2034 numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
2035
2036 *** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
2037 Fill mode.
2038
2039 *** pcomplete.el is a library that provides programmable completion
2040 facilities for Emacs, similar to what zsh and tcsh offer. The main
2041 difference is that completion functions are written in Lisp, meaning
2042 they can be profiled, debugged, etc.
2043
2044 *** antlr-mode is a new major mode for editing ANTLR grammar files.
2045 It is automatically turned on for files whose names have the extension
2046 `.g'.
2047
2048 ** Changes in sort.el
2049
2050 The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
2051 as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
2052 new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default
2053 numeric base.
2054
2055 ** Changes to Ange-ftp
2056
2057 *** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
2058 names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
2059 sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
2060
2061 *** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
2062 ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
2063
2064 *** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
2065 output ^M at the end of lines.
2066
2067 ** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor
2068 mode `iswitchb-mode'.
2069
2070 ** Just loading the msb package doesn't switch on Msb mode anymore.
2071 If you have `(require 'msb)' in your .emacs, please replace it with
2072 `(msb-mode 1)'.
2073
2074 ** Flyspell mode has various new options. See the `flyspell' Custom
2075 group.
2076
2077 ** The user option `backward-delete-char-untabify-method' controls the
2078 behavior of `backward-delete-char-untabify'. The following values
2079 are recognized:
2080
2081 `untabify' -- turn a tab to many spaces, then delete one space;
2082 `hungry' -- delete all whitespace, both tabs and spaces;
2083 `all' -- delete all whitespace, including tabs, spaces and newlines;
2084 nil -- just delete one character.
2085
2086 Default value is `untabify'.
2087
2088 [This change was made in Emacs 20.3 but not mentioned then.]
2089
2090 ** In Cperl mode `cperl-invalid-face' should now be a normal face
2091 symbol, not double-quoted.
2092
2093 ** Some packages are declared obsolete, to be removed in a future
2094 version. They are: auto-show, c-mode, hilit19, hscroll, ooutline,
2095 profile, rnews, rnewspost, and sc. Their implementations have been
2096 moved to lisp/obsolete.
2097
2098 ** auto-compression mode is no longer enabled just by loading jka-compr.el.
2099 To control it, set `auto-compression-mode' via Custom or use the
2100 `auto-compression-mode' command.
2101
2102 ** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for
2103 `browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME, and
2104 `browse-url-kde' can be chosen for invoking the KDE browser.
2105
2106 ** The user-option `browse-url-new-window-p' has been renamed to
2107 `browse-url-new-window-flag'.
2108
2109 ** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now
2110 operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode.
2111
2112 ** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It
2113 is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia.
2114
2115 ** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM
2116 support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode,
2117 use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the
2118 buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands
2119 M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a
2120 new command M-x strokes-list-strokes.
2121
2122 ** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
2123 a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
2124
2125 ** Hexl mode allows to insert non-ASCII characters.
2126
2127 The non-ASCII characters are encoded using the same encoding as the
2128 file you are visiting in Hexl mode.
2129
2130 ** Shell script mode changes.
2131
2132 Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
2133 derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizable, and
2134 sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
2135
2136 ** Etags changes.
2137
2138 *** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
2139
2140 *** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
2141 possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
2142 {lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
2143 This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
2144 a regular expression. The manual contains details.
2145
2146 *** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
2147 declarations when given the --declarations option.
2148
2149 *** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
2150 "operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
2151
2152 *** You shouldn't generally need any more the -C or -c++ option: etags
2153 automatically switches to C++ parsing when it meets the `class' or
2154 `template' keywords.
2155
2156 *** Etags now is able to delve at arbitrary deeps into nested structures in
2157 C-like languages. Previously, it was limited to one or two brace levels.
2158
2159 *** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
2160 types.
2161
2162 *** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
2163
2164 *** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
2165
2166 *** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
2167 are now tagged.
2168
2169 *** In makefiles, tags the targets.
2170
2171 *** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
2172 variables are tagged.
2173
2174 *** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
2175
2176 *** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
2177 for PSWrap.
2178
2179 ** Changes in etags.el
2180
2181 *** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
2182 tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
2183 is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
2184
2185 *** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
2186 the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
2187
2188 If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
2189 FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
2190 TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
2191 obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
2192
2193 TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
2194
2195 FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
2196 List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
2197
2198 A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
2199
2200 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
2201 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
2202 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
2203
2204 *** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
2205 of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
2206
2207 *** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
2208 names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
2209
2210 *** You can now search for tags that are part of the filename itself.
2211 If you have tagged the files topfile.c subdir/subfile.c
2212 /tmp/tempfile.c, you can now search for tags "topfile.c", "subfile.c",
2213 "dir/sub", "tempfile", "tempfile.c". If the tag matches the file name,
2214 point will go to the beginning of the file.
2215
2216 *** Compressed files are now transparently supported if
2217 auto-compression-mode is active. You can tag (with Etags) and search
2218 (with find-tag) both compressed and uncompressed files.
2219
2220 *** Tags commands like M-x tags-search no longer change point
2221 in buffers where no match is found. In buffers where a match is
2222 found, the original value of point is pushed on the marker ring.
2223
2224 ** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
2225 remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
2226 appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
2227
2228 ** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
2229
2230 ** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
2231
2232 ** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps'
2233 containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
2234 expression from that list, are not checked.
2235
2236 ** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
2237 When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
2238 and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
2239 the buffer, just like for the local files.
2240
2241 ** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
2242
2243 ** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now
2244 displays local abbrevs, only.
2245
2246 ** Refill minor mode provides preliminary support for keeping
2247 paragraphs filled as you modify them.
2248
2249 ** The variable `double-click-fuzz' specifies how much the mouse
2250 may be moved between clicks that are recognized as a pair. Its value
2251 is measured in pixels.
2252
2253 ** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files
2254 to be visited as images.
2255
2256 ** Two new user-options `grep-command' and `grep-find-command'
2257 were added to compile.el.
2258
2259 ** Withdrawn packages
2260
2261 *** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
2262 functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
2263
2264 *** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
2265
2266 *** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
2267
2268
2269 * Incompatible Lisp changes
2270
2271 There are a few Lisp changes which are not backwards-compatible and
2272 may require changes to existing code. Here is a list for reference.
2273 See the sections below for details.
2274
2275 ** Since `format' preserves text properties, the idiom
2276 `(format "%s" foo)' no longer works to copy and remove properties.
2277 Use `copy-sequence' to copy the string, then use `set-text-properties'
2278 to remove the properties of the copy.
2279
2280 ** Since the `keymap' text property now has significance, some code
2281 which uses both `local-map' and `keymap' properties (for portability)
2282 may, for instance, give rise to duplicate menus when the keymaps from
2283 these properties are active.
2284
2285 ** The change in the treatment of non-ASCII characters in search
2286 ranges may affect some code.
2287
2288 ** A non-nil value for the LOCAL arg of add-hook makes the hook
2289 buffer-local even if `make-local-hook' hasn't been called, which might
2290 make a difference to some code.
2291
2292 ** The new treatment of the minibuffer prompt might affect code which
2293 operates on the minibuffer.
2294
2295 ** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
2296 cause `no-conversion' and `emacs-mule-unix' coding systems to produce
2297 different results when reading files with non-ASCII characters
2298 (previously, both coding systems would produce the same results).
2299 Specifically, `no-conversion' interprets each 8-bit byte as a separate
2300 character. This makes `no-conversion' inappropriate for reading
2301 multibyte text, e.g. buffers written to disk in their internal MULE
2302 encoding (auto-saving does that, for example). If a Lisp program
2303 reads such files with `no-conversion', each byte of the multibyte
2304 sequence, including the MULE leading codes such as \201, is treated as
2305 a separate character, which prevents them from being interpreted in
2306 the buffer as multibyte characters.
2307
2308 Therefore, Lisp programs that read files which contain the internal
2309 MULE encoding should use `emacs-mule-unix'. `no-conversion' is only
2310 appropriate for reading truly binary files.
2311
2312 ** Code that relies on the obsolete `before-change-function' and
2313 `after-change-function' to detect buffer changes will now fail. Use
2314 `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions' instead.
2315
2316 ** Code that uses `concat' with integer args now gets an error, as
2317 long promised.
2318
2319 ** The function base64-decode-string now always returns a unibyte
2320 string.
2321
2322 ** Not a Lisp incompatibility as such but, with the introduction of
2323 extra private charsets, there is now only one slot free for a new
2324 dimension-2 private charset. User code which tries to add more than
2325 one extra will fail unless you rebuild Emacs with some standard
2326 charset(s) removed; that is probably inadvisable because it changes
2327 the emacs-mule encoding. Also, files stored in the emacs-mule
2328 encoding using Emacs 20 with additional private charsets defined will
2329 probably not be read correctly by Emacs 21.
2330
2331 ** The variable `directory-sep-char' is slated for removal.
2332 Not really a change (yet), but a projected one that you should be
2333 aware of: The variable `directory-sep-char' is deprecated, and should
2334 not be used. It was always ignored on GNU/Linux and Unix systems and
2335 on MS-DOS, but the MS-Windows port tried to support it by adapting the
2336 behavior of certain primitives to the value of this variable. It
2337 turned out that such support cannot be reliable, so it was decided to
2338 remove this variable in the near future. Lisp programs are well
2339 advised not to set it to anything but '/', because any different value
2340 will not have any effect when support for this variable is removed.
2341
2342
2343 * Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
2344 (Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
2345
2346 ** Function assq-delete-all replaces function assoc-delete-all.
2347
2348 ** The new function animate-string, from lisp/play/animate.el
2349 allows the animated display of strings.
2350
2351 ** The new function `interactive-form' can be used to obtain the
2352 interactive form of a function.
2353
2354 ** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
2355 between custom options. Example:
2356
2357 (defcustom default-input-method nil
2358 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
2359 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
2360 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
2361 :group 'mule
2362 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
2363 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
2364
2365 This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
2366 current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
2367 first in a custom-set-variables statement.
2368
2369 ** The new hook `kbd-macro-termination-hook' is run at the end of
2370 function execute-kbd-macro. Functions on this hook are called with no
2371 args. The hook is run independent of how the macro was terminated
2372 (signal or normal termination).
2373
2374 ** Functions `butlast' and `nbutlast' for removing trailing elements
2375 from a list are now available without requiring the CL package.
2376
2377 ** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil
2378 to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights.
2379
2380 ** The user-option `face-font-registry-alternatives' specifies
2381 alternative font registry names to try when looking for a font.
2382
2383 ** Function `md5' calculates the MD5 "message digest"/"checksum".
2384
2385 ** Function `delete-frame' runs `delete-frame-hook' before actually
2386 deleting the frame. The hook is called with one arg, the frame
2387 being deleted.
2388
2389 ** `add-hook' now makes the hook local if called with a non-nil LOCAL arg.
2390
2391 ** The treatment of non-ASCII characters in search ranges has changed.
2392 If a range in a regular expression or the arg of
2393 skip-chars-forward/backward starts with a unibyte character C and ends
2394 with a multibyte character C2, the range is divided into two: one is
2395 C..?\377, the other is C1..C2, where C1 is the first character of C2's
2396 charset.
2397
2398 ** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in
2399 the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the
2400 message.
2401
2402 ** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an
2403 expression with auto-compression-mode enabled.
2404
2405 ** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced
2406 with the more general `:mask' property.
2407
2408 ** Image specifications accept more `:conversion's.
2409
2410 ** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a
2411 backslash.
2412
2413 ** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
2414 is running in batch mode. For example,
2415
2416 (message "%s" (read t))
2417
2418 will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
2419 to standard output.
2420
2421 ** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
2422 `kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
2423
2424 ** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
2425 will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
2426 frame or window.
2427
2428 ** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
2429 were added
2430
2431 - Function: remove ELT SEQ
2432
2433 Return a copy of SEQ with all occurrences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
2434 a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
2435
2436 - Function: remq ELT LIST
2437
2438 Return a copy of LIST with all occurrences of ELT removed. The
2439 comparison is done with `eq'.
2440
2441 ** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
2442
2443 ** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
2444 has been changed: WEAK can now have new values `key-or-value' and
2445 `key-and-value', in addition the `nil', `key', `value', and `t'.
2446
2447 ** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
2448 without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
2449 convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
2450
2451 ** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
2452 or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
2453
2454 ** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
2455 function was declared obsolete.
2456
2457 ** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
2458 retained as an alias).
2459
2460 ** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
2461 It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
2462 is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
2463
2464 ** The new function `window-list' has been defined
2465
2466 - Function: window-list &optional FRAME WINDOW MINIBUF
2467
2468 Return a list of windows on FRAME, starting with WINDOW. FRAME nil or
2469 omitted means use the selected frame. WINDOW nil or omitted means use
2470 the selected window. MINIBUF t means include the minibuffer window,
2471 even if it isn't active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means include the
2472 minibuffer window only if it's active. MINIBUF neither nil nor t
2473 means never include the minibuffer window.
2474
2475 ** There's a new function `get-window-with-predicate' defined as follows
2476
2477 - Function: get-window-with-predicate PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
2478
2479 Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
2480
2481 This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
2482 calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
2483 argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
2484 value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
2485 returned.
2486
2487 Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
2488 if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
2489 it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
2490 minibuffer even if it is active.
2491
2492 Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
2493 counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
2494 too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
2495 and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
2496 `walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
2497 entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
2498
2499 ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
2500 ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
2501 ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
2502 ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
2503 ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
2504 If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
2505 Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
2506
2507 ** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
2508 event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
2509 argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
2510
2511 ** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
2512 call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
2513 message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
2514 Default value is nil.
2515
2516 ** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
2517 meaning no limit.
2518
2519 ** The new user option `line-number-display-limit-width' controls
2520 the maximum width of lines in a buffer for which Emacs displays line
2521 numbers in the mode line. The default is 200.
2522
2523 ** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
2524 coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
2525 DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
2526
2527 ** The function `subr-arity' provides information about the argument
2528 list of a primitive.
2529
2530 ** `where-is-internal' now also accepts a list of keymaps.
2531
2532 ** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
2533 buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
2534 This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
2535 than replacing the local map.
2536
2537 ** The obsolete variables `before-change-function' and
2538 `after-change-function' are no longer acted upon and have been
2539 removed. Use `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions'
2540 instead.
2541
2542 ** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
2543
2544 ** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments,
2545 as promised long ago.
2546
2547 ** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
2548
2549 ** The new variable auto-coding-regexp-alist specifies coding systems
2550 for reading specific files, analogous to auto-coding-alist, but
2551 patterns are checked against file contents instead of file names.
2552
2553
2554 * Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
2555
2556 ** The new package rx.el provides an alternative sexp notation for
2557 regular expressions.
2558
2559 - Function: rx-to-string SEXP
2560
2561 Translate SEXP into a regular expression in string notation.
2562
2563 - Macro: rx SEXP
2564
2565 Translate SEXP into a regular expression in string notation.
2566
2567 The following are valid subforms of regular expressions in sexp
2568 notation.
2569
2570 STRING
2571 matches string STRING literally.
2572
2573 CHAR
2574 matches character CHAR literally.
2575
2576 `not-newline'
2577 matches any character except a newline.
2578 .
2579 `anything'
2580 matches any character
2581
2582 `(any SET)'
2583 matches any character in SET. SET may be a character or string.
2584 Ranges of characters can be specified as `A-Z' in strings.
2585
2586 '(in SET)'
2587 like `any'.
2588
2589 `(not (any SET))'
2590 matches any character not in SET
2591
2592 `line-start'
2593 matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of a line
2594 in the text being matched
2595
2596 `line-end'
2597 is similar to `line-start' but matches only at the end of a line
2598
2599 `string-start'
2600 matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of the
2601 string being matched against.
2602
2603 `string-end'
2604 matches the empty string, but only at the end of the
2605 string being matched against.
2606
2607 `buffer-start'
2608 matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of the
2609 buffer being matched against.
2610
2611 `buffer-end'
2612 matches the empty string, but only at the end of the
2613 buffer being matched against.
2614
2615 `point'
2616 matches the empty string, but only at point.
2617
2618 `word-start'
2619 matches the empty string, but only at the beginning or end of a
2620 word.
2621
2622 `word-end'
2623 matches the empty string, but only at the end of a word.
2624
2625 `word-boundary'
2626 matches the empty string, but only at the beginning or end of a
2627 word.
2628
2629 `(not word-boundary)'
2630 matches the empty string, but not at the beginning or end of a
2631 word.
2632
2633 `digit'
2634 matches 0 through 9.
2635
2636 `control'
2637 matches ASCII control characters.
2638
2639 `hex-digit'
2640 matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
2641
2642 `blank'
2643 matches space and tab only.
2644
2645 `graphic'
2646 matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
2647 space, and DEL.
2648
2649 `printing'
2650 matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
2651 and DEL.
2652
2653 `alphanumeric'
2654 matches letters and digits. (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2655 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2656
2657 `letter'
2658 matches letters. (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2659 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2660
2661 `ascii'
2662 matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
2663
2664 `nonascii'
2665 matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
2666
2667 `lower'
2668 matches anything lower-case.
2669
2670 `upper'
2671 matches anything upper-case.
2672
2673 `punctuation'
2674 matches punctuation. (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2675 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
2676
2677 `space'
2678 matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
2679
2680 `word'
2681 matches anything that has word syntax.
2682
2683 `(syntax SYNTAX)'
2684 matches a character with syntax SYNTAX. SYNTAX must be one
2685 of the following symbols.
2686
2687 `whitespace' (\\s- in string notation)
2688 `punctuation' (\\s.)
2689 `word' (\\sw)
2690 `symbol' (\\s_)
2691 `open-parenthesis' (\\s()
2692 `close-parenthesis' (\\s))
2693 `expression-prefix' (\\s')
2694 `string-quote' (\\s\")
2695 `paired-delimiter' (\\s$)
2696 `escape' (\\s\\)
2697 `character-quote' (\\s/)
2698 `comment-start' (\\s<)
2699 `comment-end' (\\s>)
2700
2701 `(not (syntax SYNTAX))'
2702 matches a character that has not syntax SYNTAX.
2703
2704 `(category CATEGORY)'
2705 matches a character with category CATEGORY. CATEGORY must be
2706 either a character to use for C, or one of the following symbols.
2707
2708 `consonant' (\\c0 in string notation)
2709 `base-vowel' (\\c1)
2710 `upper-diacritical-mark' (\\c2)
2711 `lower-diacritical-mark' (\\c3)
2712 `tone-mark' (\\c4)
2713 `symbol' (\\c5)
2714 `digit' (\\c6)
2715 `vowel-modifying-diacritical-mark' (\\c7)
2716 `vowel-sign' (\\c8)
2717 `semivowel-lower' (\\c9)
2718 `not-at-end-of-line' (\\c<)
2719 `not-at-beginning-of-line' (\\c>)
2720 `alpha-numeric-two-byte' (\\cA)
2721 `chinse-two-byte' (\\cC)
2722 `greek-two-byte' (\\cG)
2723 `japanese-hiragana-two-byte' (\\cH)
2724 `indian-tow-byte' (\\cI)
2725 `japanese-katakana-two-byte' (\\cK)
2726 `korean-hangul-two-byte' (\\cN)
2727 `cyrillic-two-byte' (\\cY)
2728 `ascii' (\\ca)
2729 `arabic' (\\cb)
2730 `chinese' (\\cc)
2731 `ethiopic' (\\ce)
2732 `greek' (\\cg)
2733 `korean' (\\ch)
2734 `indian' (\\ci)
2735 `japanese' (\\cj)
2736 `japanese-katakana' (\\ck)
2737 `latin' (\\cl)
2738 `lao' (\\co)
2739 `tibetan' (\\cq)
2740 `japanese-roman' (\\cr)
2741 `thai' (\\ct)
2742 `vietnamese' (\\cv)
2743 `hebrew' (\\cw)
2744 `cyrillic' (\\cy)
2745 `can-break' (\\c|)
2746
2747 `(not (category CATEGORY))'
2748 matches a character that has not category CATEGORY.
2749
2750 `(and SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)'
2751 matches what SEXP1 matches, followed by what SEXP2 matches, etc.
2752
2753 `(submatch SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)'
2754 like `and', but makes the match accessible with `match-end',
2755 `match-beginning', and `match-string'.
2756
2757 `(group SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)'
2758 another name for `submatch'.
2759
2760 `(or SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)'
2761 matches anything that matches SEXP1 or SEXP2, etc. If all
2762 args are strings, use `regexp-opt' to optimize the resulting
2763 regular expression.
2764
2765 `(minimal-match SEXP)'
2766 produce a non-greedy regexp for SEXP. Normally, regexps matching
2767 zero or more occurrences of something are \"greedy\" in that they
2768 match as much as they can, as long as the overall regexp can
2769 still match. A non-greedy regexp matches as little as possible.
2770
2771 `(maximal-match SEXP)'
2772 produce a greedy regexp for SEXP. This is the default.
2773
2774 `(zero-or-more SEXP)'
2775 matches zero or more occurrences of what SEXP matches.
2776
2777 `(0+ SEXP)'
2778 like `zero-or-more'.
2779
2780 `(* SEXP)'
2781 like `zero-or-more', but always produces a greedy regexp.
2782
2783 `(*? SEXP)'
2784 like `zero-or-more', but always produces a non-greedy regexp.
2785
2786 `(one-or-more SEXP)'
2787 matches one or more occurrences of A.
2788
2789 `(1+ SEXP)'
2790 like `one-or-more'.
2791
2792 `(+ SEXP)'
2793 like `one-or-more', but always produces a greedy regexp.
2794
2795 `(+? SEXP)'
2796 like `one-or-more', but always produces a non-greedy regexp.
2797
2798 `(zero-or-one SEXP)'
2799 matches zero or one occurrences of A.
2800
2801 `(optional SEXP)'
2802 like `zero-or-one'.
2803
2804 `(? SEXP)'
2805 like `zero-or-one', but always produces a greedy regexp.
2806
2807 `(?? SEXP)'
2808 like `zero-or-one', but always produces a non-greedy regexp.
2809
2810 `(repeat N SEXP)'
2811 matches N occurrences of what SEXP matches.
2812
2813 `(repeat N M SEXP)'
2814 matches N to M occurrences of what SEXP matches.
2815
2816 `(eval FORM)'
2817 evaluate FORM and insert result. If result is a string,
2818 `regexp-quote' it.
2819
2820 `(regexp REGEXP)'
2821 include REGEXP in string notation in the result.
2822
2823 *** The features `md5' and `overlay' are now provided by default.
2824
2825 *** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
2826 buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
2827 the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
2828 restriction to be restored incorrectly.
2829
2830 *** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
2831 `eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
2832 when they find 8-bit characters. Previously, they included `ascii' in a
2833 multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
2834
2835 *** The functions `set-buffer-multibyte', `string-as-multibyte' and
2836 `string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer or a string
2837 if it contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
2838
2839 *** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
2840 changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
2841 [\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
2842 regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
2843 the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
2844 extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
2845 bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
2846 eight-bit-graphic.
2847
2848 ** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
2849
2850 A fontset can now be specified for each independent character, for
2851 a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
2852 character set as previously.
2853
2854 *** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
2855 They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
2856 modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
2857
2858 CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
2859 characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
2860 range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
2861 case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
2862
2863 FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
2864 name of a font and REGISTRY is a registry name of a font.
2865
2866 *** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
2867 registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
2868 "fontset-default".
2869
2870 *** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
2871 argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
2872
2873 ** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
2874 composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
2875 buffers and strings.
2876
2877 *** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
2878 character' which is an independent character with a unique character
2879 code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
2880 have been deleted: composite-char-component,
2881 composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
2882 composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
2883 The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
2884 also been deleted.
2885
2886 *** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
2887 specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
2888 `reference-point-alist' for more detail.
2889
2890 *** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
2891 MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
2892 composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
2893 may differ between buffer and string text.
2894
2895 *** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
2896 COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
2897
2898 *** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
2899 directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
2900 Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
2901 `composition' from STRING.
2902
2903 *** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
2904 a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
2905
2906 *** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
2907 obsolete.
2908
2909 ** The new coding system `mac-roman' is primarily intended for use on
2910 the Macintosh but may be used generally for Macintosh-encoded text.
2911
2912 ** The new character sets `mule-unicode-0100-24ff',
2913 `mule-unicode-2500-33ff', and `mule-unicode-e000-ffff' have been
2914 introduced for Unicode characters in the range U+0100..U+24FF,
2915 U+2500..U+33FF, U+E000..U+FFFF respectively.
2916
2917 Note that the character sets are not yet unified in Emacs, so
2918 characters which belong to charsets such as Latin-2, Greek, Hebrew,
2919 etc. and the same characters in the `mule-unicode-*' charsets are
2920 different characters, as far as Emacs is concerned. For example, text
2921 which includes Unicode characters from the Latin-2 locale cannot be
2922 encoded by Emacs with ISO 8859-2 coding system.
2923
2924 ** The new coding system `mule-utf-8' has been added.
2925 It provides limited support for decoding/encoding UTF-8 text. For
2926 details, please see the documentation string of this coding system.
2927
2928 ** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
2929 `japanese-jisx0213-2' have been introduced for the new Japanese
2930 standard JIS X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
2931
2932 ** The new character sets `latin-iso8859-14' and `latin-iso8859-15'
2933 have been introduced.
2934
2935 ** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
2936 have been introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
2937 0xA0..0xFF respectively. Note that the multibyte representation of
2938 eight-bit-control is never exposed; this leads to an exception in the
2939 emacs-mule coding system, which encodes everything else to the
2940 buffer/string internal representation. Note that to search for
2941 eight-bit-graphic characters in a multibyte buffer, the search string
2942 must be multibyte, otherwise such characters will be converted to
2943 their multibyte equivalent.
2944
2945 ** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
2946 that offset in the file before writing.
2947
2948 ** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
2949 compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
2950
2951 ** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
2952 `*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
2953 from which the command was issued.
2954
2955 ** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
2956 `query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
2957 `replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
2958 additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
2959 operate on.
2960
2961 ** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
2962 to `window-buffer-height'.
2963
2964 - Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
2965
2966 Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
2967 The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
2968 lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
2969
2970 Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
2971 respectively.
2972
2973 If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optional third argument
2974 COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
2975
2976 The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
2977 obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
2978 on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
2979
2980 Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
2981 buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
2982 possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
2983 is currently displayed in some window.
2984
2985 ** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
2986 argument function's results.
2987
2988 ** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
2989 signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails. Also,
2990 `base64-decode-string' now always returns a unibyte string (in Emacs
2991 20, it returned a multibyte string when the result was a valid multibyte
2992 sequence).
2993
2994 ** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
2995 header in the list of headers passed to it.
2996
2997 ** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
2998 ignores differences in case and text representation.
2999
3000 ** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
3001 cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
3002 as follows:
3003
3004 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
3005 nil don't display a cursor
3006 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
3007 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
3008 others display a box cursor.
3009
3010 ** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
3011 an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
3012 defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
3013 set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
3014
3015 ** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
3016 specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
3017 the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
3018 text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
3019
3020 Example:
3021
3022 (string-to-syntax "()")
3023 => (4 . 41)
3024
3025 ** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
3026 other than 10.
3027
3028 *** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
3029 INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
3030
3031 #b1111
3032 => 15
3033 #b-1111
3034 => -15
3035
3036 *** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
3037
3038 #o666
3039 => 438
3040
3041 *** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
3042
3043 #xbeef
3044 => 48815
3045
3046 *** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
3047
3048 #2R-111
3049 => -7
3050 #25rah
3051 => 267
3052
3053 ** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
3054 the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
3055 and isn't a string.
3056
3057 ** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
3058 a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
3059 value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
3060 not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
3061
3062 ** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
3063
3064 ** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
3065 for a regexp in a string.
3066
3067 ** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
3068 `mouse-position-function'.
3069
3070 ** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
3071 that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
3072
3073 ** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
3074 Keywords are now always considered constants.
3075
3076 ** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
3077 returns it.
3078
3079 ** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
3080 returned by function `recent-keys'.
3081
3082 ** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
3083 can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
3084 Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding C-M-a
3085 etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
3086 mode.
3087
3088 ** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
3089 and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
3090
3091 ** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
3092 has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
3093 function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
3094 returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
3095 been performed."
3096
3097 When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
3098 and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
3099 hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
3100 then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
3101
3102 ** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
3103 In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
3104 and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
3105
3106 ** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
3107 with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
3108 specified table.
3109
3110 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
3111
3112 Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
3113 TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
3114 saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
3115 what BODY returns.
3116
3117 ** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
3118 Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
3119 Also back-references like \2 are now considered as an error if the
3120 corresponding subgroup does not exist (or is not closed yet).
3121 Previously it would have been silently turned into `2' (ignoring the `\').
3122
3123 ** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
3124 removed since it wasn't used by anything.
3125
3126 ** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
3127 instead of being optional.
3128
3129 ** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
3130 modify read-only text.
3131
3132 ** New functions and variables for locales.
3133
3134 The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
3135 decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
3136 time functions like strftime. The new variables
3137 `system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
3138 locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
3139
3140 The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
3141 environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
3142 the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
3143 environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
3144 not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
3145 `locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
3146 `locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
3147
3148 ** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
3149 To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
3150 modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
3151 start sequences.
3152
3153 ** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
3154 because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
3155
3156 ** New function `propertize'
3157
3158 The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
3159 strings with text properties.
3160
3161 - Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
3162
3163 Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
3164 by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
3165 PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
3166 specified value of that property. Example:
3167
3168 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
3169
3170 ** push and pop macros.
3171
3172 Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
3173 are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
3174 as the place that holds the list to be changed.
3175
3176 (push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
3177 (pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
3178 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
3179
3180 ** New dolist and dotimes macros.
3181
3182 Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
3183 are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
3184
3185 (dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
3186 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
3187 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
3188 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
3189
3190 (dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
3191 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
3192 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
3193 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
3194
3195 ** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such as
3196 [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on. These must be used within a character
3197 class--for instance, [-[:digit:].+] matches digits or a period
3198 or a sign.
3199
3200 [:digit:] matches 0 through 9
3201 [:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
3202 [:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
3203 [:blank:] matches space and tab only
3204 [:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
3205 space, and DEL.
3206 [:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
3207 and DEL.
3208 [:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
3209 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
3210 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
3211 [:alpha:] matches letters.
3212 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
3213 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
3214 [:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
3215 [:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
3216 [:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
3217 [:punct:] matches punctuation.
3218 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
3219 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
3220 [:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
3221 [:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
3222 [:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
3223
3224 ** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
3225
3226 The following functions are defined for hash tables:
3227
3228 - Function: make-hash-table ARGS
3229
3230 The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
3231 are optional. The following arguments are defined:
3232
3233 :test TEST
3234
3235 TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
3236 Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
3237 it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
3238
3239 :size SIZE
3240
3241 SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
3242 many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
3243
3244 :rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
3245
3246 REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
3247 full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
3248 size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
3249 1.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
3250 old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
3251
3252 :rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
3253
3254 THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
3255 hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
3256 (size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
3257
3258 :weakness WEAK
3259
3260 WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
3261 `key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
3262 `key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
3263 collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
3264 outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
3265
3266 - Function: makehash &optional TEST
3267
3268 Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
3269
3270 - Function: hash-table-p TABLE
3271
3272 Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
3273
3274 - Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
3275
3276 Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
3277 values are shared.
3278
3279 - Function: hash-table-count TABLE
3280
3281 Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
3282
3283 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
3284
3285 Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
3286
3287 - Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
3288
3289 Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
3290
3291 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
3292
3293 Returns the size of TABLE.
3294
3295 - Function: hash-table-test TABLE
3296
3297 Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
3298
3299 - Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
3300
3301 Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
3302
3303 - Function: clrhash TABLE
3304
3305 Clear TABLE.
3306
3307 - Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
3308
3309 Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
3310 not found.
3311
3312 - Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
3313
3314 Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
3315 another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
3316
3317 - Function: remhash KEY TABLE
3318
3319 Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
3320
3321 - Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
3322
3323 Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
3324 arguments KEY and VALUE.
3325
3326 - Function: sxhash OBJ
3327
3328 Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
3329
3330 - Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
3331
3332 Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
3333 a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
3334 comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
3335 and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
3336 of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
3337
3338 TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
3339
3340 HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
3341 code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
3342 integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
3343
3344 Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
3345 be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
3346
3347 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
3348 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
3349
3350 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
3351 (sxhash (upcase a)))
3352
3353 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
3354 'case-fold-string-hash))
3355
3356 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
3357
3358 ** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
3359
3360 It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
3361 circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
3362 a cons cell which is its own cdr.
3363
3364 ** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
3365
3366 If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
3367 #N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
3368
3369 ** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
3370 t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
3371 specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
3372 is too short to reach that column.
3373
3374 ** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
3375 now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
3376 after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
3377 two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
3378
3379 If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
3380 perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
3381 and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
3382
3383 ** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
3384 to specify which buffer to return the size of.
3385
3386 ** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
3387 calendar-move-hook after moving point.
3388
3389 ** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
3390 directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
3391 small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
3392 small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
3393 temporary-file-directory instead.
3394
3395 ** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
3396 the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
3397 `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
3398 hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
3399
3400 ** assq-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
3401 elements of an alist which have a car `eq' to a particular value.
3402
3403 ** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
3404
3405 make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
3406 creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
3407 ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
3408
3409 ** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
3410
3411 The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
3412 on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
3413 is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
3414 never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
3415 ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
3416 overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
3417
3418 If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
3419 that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
3420 to get an error if the file exists at that time.
3421 The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
3422
3423 ** Function `format' now handles text properties.
3424
3425 Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
3426 If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
3427 ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
3428 result string.
3429
3430 Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
3431 string where arguments appear in the result string.
3432
3433 Example:
3434
3435 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
3436 (s2 "world"))
3437 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
3438 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
3439 (format s1 s2))
3440
3441 results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
3442
3443 ** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
3444
3445 Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
3446 The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
3447 argument in it.
3448
3449 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
3450 (arg "world"))
3451 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
3452 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
3453 (message msg arg))
3454
3455 ** Sound support
3456
3457 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
3458 (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
3459
3460 Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
3461 (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
3462 to enable sound support.
3463
3464 Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
3465 list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
3466 when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
3467 functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
3468 sound to play, before playing the sound.
3469
3470 The following sound properties are supported:
3471
3472 - `:file FILE'
3473
3474 FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
3475 searched relative to `data-directory'.
3476
3477 - `:data DATA'
3478
3479 DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
3480 may be present, but not both.
3481
3482 - `:volume VOLUME'
3483
3484 VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
3485 0..1. This property is optional.
3486
3487 - `:device DEVICE'
3488
3489 DEVICE is a string specifying the system device on which to play the
3490 sound. The default device is system-dependent.
3491
3492 Other properties are ignored.
3493
3494 An alternative interface is called as
3495 (play-sound-file FILE &optional VOLUME DEVICE).
3496
3497 ** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
3498
3499 ** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
3500 a keyword symbol.
3501
3502 ** Changes to garbage collection
3503
3504 *** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
3505 of live and free strings.
3506
3507 *** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
3508 strings that have been consed so far.
3509
3510
3511 * Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
3512 Lisp Manual
3513
3514 ** The user-option `resize-mini-windows' controls how Emacs resizes
3515 mini-windows.
3516
3517 ** The function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now has a third optional
3518 argument, PARTIALLY. If a character is only partially visible, nil is
3519 returned, unless PARTIALLY is non-nil.
3520
3521 ** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used.
3522
3523 ** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
3524
3525 ** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
3526 image.
3527
3528 - Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
3529
3530 Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
3531
3532 SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
3533 measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
3534 character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
3535 font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
3536 FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
3537
3538 ** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image
3539 has a mask bitmap.
3540
3541 - Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME
3542
3543 Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap.
3544 FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil
3545 or omitted means use the selected frame.
3546
3547 ** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
3548 satisfying one of a list of specifications.
3549
3550 ** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
3551 optional.
3552
3553 ** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see
3554 below).
3555
3556
3557 * New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
3558
3559 ** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
3560 to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
3561
3562 Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
3563 text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
3564 is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
3565 your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
3566 laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
3567 just display it black instead.
3568
3569 This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
3570 a line like
3571
3572 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
3573
3574 in your `.emacs'.
3575
3576 ** New face implementation.
3577
3578 Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
3579 font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
3580
3581 *** New faces.
3582
3583 Each face can specify the following display attributes:
3584
3585 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
3586
3587 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
3588 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
3589
3590 3. Font height in 1/10pt
3591
3592 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
3593
3594 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
3595
3596 6. Foreground color.
3597
3598 7. Background color.
3599
3600 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
3601
3602 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
3603
3604 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
3605
3606 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
3607
3608 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
3609 color.
3610
3611 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
3612 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
3613
3614 Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
3615 same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
3616 frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
3617 faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
3618 with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each of the face
3619 attributes mentioned above.
3620
3621 There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
3622 definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
3623 created frames.
3624
3625 A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
3626 have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
3627 `fully-specified'.
3628
3629 *** Face merging.
3630
3631 The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
3632 combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
3633 aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
3634 properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
3635 that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
3636 results in a fully-specified face.
3637
3638 *** Face realization.
3639
3640 After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
3641 merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
3642 realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
3643 available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
3644 face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
3645 cache of the frame on which it was realized.
3646
3647 Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
3648 character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
3649 for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
3650 charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
3651
3652 Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
3653 specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
3654 being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
3655 the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
3656 statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
3657
3658 In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
3659 `char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
3660 0x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
3661 the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
3662 initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
3663 Emacs.
3664
3665 Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
3666 `enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
3667 registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
3668 with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
3669
3670 **** Clearing face caches.
3671
3672 The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
3673 on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
3674 unused fonts.
3675
3676 *** Font selection.
3677
3678 Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
3679 given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
3680 for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
3681
3682 If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
3683 pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
3684 family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
3685 property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
3686 an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
3687
3688 Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
3689 against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
3690 match for the given face attributes in this font list.
3691
3692 Font selection can be influenced by the user.
3693
3694 The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
3695 attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
3696 face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
3697 names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
3698 that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
3699 width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
3700 to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
3701
3702 Setting `face-font-family-alternatives' allows the user to specify
3703 alternative font families to try if a family specified by a face
3704 doesn't exist.
3705
3706 Setting `face-font-registry-alternatives' allows the user to specify
3707 all alternative font registry names to try for a face specifying a
3708 registry.
3709
3710 Please note that the interpretations of the above two variables are
3711 slightly different.
3712
3713 Setting face-ignored-fonts allows the user to ignore specific fonts.
3714
3715
3716 **** Scalable fonts
3717
3718 Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
3719 since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
3720 servers.
3721
3722 To enable scalable font use, set the variable
3723 `scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
3724 scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
3725 Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
3726 scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
3727 that list. Example:
3728
3729 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
3730
3731 allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
3732
3733 *** Functions and variables related to font selection.
3734
3735 - Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
3736
3737 Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
3738 is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
3739 string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
3740
3741 If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
3742 the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
3743 FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
3744 POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
3745 SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
3746 These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
3747 if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
3748 REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
3749 the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
3750 of the face font sort order.
3751
3752 - Function: x-font-family-list
3753
3754 Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
3755 omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
3756 (FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
3757 non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
3758
3759 - Variable: font-list-limit
3760
3761 Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
3762 won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
3763 matching font. The default is currently 100.
3764
3765 *** Setting face attributes.
3766
3767 For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
3768 with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
3769 implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
3770 `face-attribute'.
3771
3772 Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
3773 symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
3774
3775 The following attributes are recognized:
3776
3777 `:family'
3778
3779 VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
3780 or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
3781 and `?' are allowed.
3782
3783 `:width'
3784
3785 VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
3786 It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
3787 `condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
3788 `extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
3789
3790 `:height'
3791
3792 VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use
3793 in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to
3794 scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old
3795 height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height.
3796
3797 `:weight'
3798
3799 VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
3800 symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
3801 `semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
3802
3803 `:slant'
3804
3805 VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
3806 symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
3807 `reverse-oblique'.
3808
3809 `:foreground', `:background'
3810
3811 VALUE must be a color name, a string.
3812
3813 `:underline'
3814
3815 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
3816 VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
3817 a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
3818 don't underline.
3819
3820 `:overline'
3821
3822 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
3823 VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
3824 string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
3825 overline.
3826
3827 `:strike-through'
3828
3829 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
3830 striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
3831 face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
3832 is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
3833
3834 `:box'
3835
3836 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
3837 around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
3838 VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
3839 of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
3840 and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
3841 VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
3842 :color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
3843 the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
3844 specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
3845 defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
3846 the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
3847 color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
3848 should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
3849 like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
3850 that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
3851 the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
3852 box.
3853
3854 `:inverse-video'
3855
3856 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
3857 inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
3858
3859 `:stipple'
3860
3861 If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
3862 The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
3863 searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
3864 HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
3865 is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
3866 explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
3867
3868 For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
3869 and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
3870
3871 `:font'
3872
3873 Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
3874 XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
3875 is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
3876 versions of Emacs.
3877
3878 For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
3879 be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
3880 must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
3881
3882 Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
3883 `defface'.
3884
3885 `:inherit'
3886
3887 VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list
3888 of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face
3889 like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces.
3890
3891 *** Face attributes and X resources
3892
3893 The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
3894 from X resources:
3895
3896 Face attribute X resource class
3897 -----------------------------------------------------------------------
3898 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
3899 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
3900 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
3901 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
3902 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
3903 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
3904 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
3905 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
3906 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
3907 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
3908 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
3909 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
3910 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
3911 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
3912 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
3913 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3914 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
3915 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
3916 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3917
3918 *** Text property `face'.
3919
3920 The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
3921 specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
3922 specification can be
3923
3924 1. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
3925
3926 2. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
3927 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
3928 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
3929 for face attribute names.
3930
3931 3. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
3932 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
3933 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
3934
3935 ** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
3936
3937 The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
3938 on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
3939 the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
3940 default. You can get defined colors with a call to
3941 `defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
3942 used to clear the mapping table.
3943
3944 ** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
3945
3946 The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
3947 and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
3948 type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
3949 color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
3950 display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
3951 old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
3952 `x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
3953 compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
3954 should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
3955 modify their color-related behavior.
3956
3957 The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
3958 any frame type.
3959
3960 ** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
3961
3962 The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
3963 `display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
3964 `display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
3965 `display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
3966 `display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
3967 `display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
3968 display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
3969 the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
3970 platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
3971
3972 The new function `display-images-p' returns non-nil if a particular
3973 display can display image files.
3974
3975 ** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
3976
3977 This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
3978 To disallow this completely (like previous versions of emacs), customize
3979 the variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', and turn on the
3980 `Inviolable' option.
3981
3982 The function minibuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
3983 end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
3984 Otherwise, it returns zero.
3985
3986 ** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
3987
3988 There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
3989 buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
3990 property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
3991
3992 Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
3993 forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
3994 to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
3995 not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
3996 commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
3997 boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
3998 `inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
3999 functions.
4000
4001 Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
4002 a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
4003 editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
4004
4005 The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
4006
4007 - Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
4008
4009 Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
4010
4011 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
4012 If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
4013 constrained position if that is different.
4014
4015 If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
4016 positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
4017 ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
4018 constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
4019 as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
4020 is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
4021 fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
4022 the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
4023 also considered to be `on the boundary'.
4024
4025 If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
4026 NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
4027 unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
4028 C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
4029 only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
4030
4031 If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
4032 a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
4033
4034 Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
4035
4036 - Function: delete-field &optional POS
4037
4038 Delete the field surrounding POS.
4039 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
4040 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
4041
4042 - Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
4043
4044 Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
4045 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
4046 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
4047 If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
4048 field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
4049
4050 - Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
4051
4052 Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
4053 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
4054 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
4055 If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
4056 then the end of the *following* field is returned.
4057
4058 - Function: field-string &optional POS
4059
4060 Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
4061 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
4062 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
4063
4064 - Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
4065
4066 Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
4067 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
4068 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
4069
4070 ** Image support.
4071
4072 Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
4073 strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
4074 (AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
4075 replaces the display of the characters having that property.
4076
4077 If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
4078 `(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
4079 AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
4080 window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
4081 area.
4082
4083 IMAGE is an image specification.
4084
4085 *** Image specifications
4086
4087 Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
4088 is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
4089 specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
4090 symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
4091 described below are ignored.
4092
4093 The following is a list of properties all image types share.
4094
4095 `:ascent ASCENT'
4096
4097 ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
4098 If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
4099 to use for its ascent.
4100
4101 If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
4102 image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
4103
4104 If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
4105 centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
4106 of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
4107 overlays that apply to the image.
4108
4109 `:margin MARGIN'
4110
4111 MARGIN must be either a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put
4112 as margin around the image, or a pair (X . Y) with X specifying the
4113 horizontal margin and Y specifying the vertical margin. Default is 0.
4114
4115 `:relief RELIEF'
4116
4117 RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
4118 around an image.
4119
4120 `:conversion ALGO'
4121
4122 Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it.
4123
4124 ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss''
4125 edge-detection algorithm to the image.
4126
4127 ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means
4128 apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a
4129 nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at
4130 position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels
4131 around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the
4132 neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the
4133 transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at
4134 x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown
4135 below.
4136
4137 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
4138 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
4139 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
4140
4141 The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
4142 resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
4143 multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
4144 of the factors' absolute values.
4145
4146 Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
4147
4148 (1 0 0
4149 0 0 0
4150 9 9 -1)
4151
4152 Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
4153
4154 ( 2 -1 0
4155 -1 0 1
4156 0 1 -2)
4157
4158 ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks
4159 ``disabled''.
4160
4161 `:mask MASK'
4162
4163 If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for
4164 the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the
4165 image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the
4166 background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the
4167 image, assuming the most frequently occurring color from the corners is
4168 the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED
4169 GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the
4170 image.
4171
4172 If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images
4173 in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying
4174 `:mask nil'.
4175
4176 `:file FILE'
4177
4178 Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
4179 search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
4180 building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
4181 may be present in the image specification.
4182
4183 `:data DATA'
4184
4185 Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
4186 supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
4187 present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
4188 support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
4189
4190 *** Supported image types
4191
4192 **** XBM, image type `xbm'.
4193
4194 XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
4195 properties supported are:
4196
4197 `:foreground FG'
4198
4199 FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil
4200 meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's foreground color.
4201
4202 `:background BG'
4203
4204 BG must be a string specifying the image background color, or nil
4205 meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's background color.
4206
4207 XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
4208 case, the image specification must contain the following properties
4209 instead of a `:file' property.
4210
4211 `:width WIDTH'
4212
4213 WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
4214
4215 `:height HEIGHT'
4216
4217 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
4218
4219 `:data DATA'
4220
4221 DATA must be either
4222
4223 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
4224 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
4225
4226 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
4227
4228 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
4229 bitmap.
4230
4231 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
4232 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
4233 in the file.
4234
4235 **** XPM, image type `xpm'
4236
4237 XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
4238 `xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
4239 found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
4240 `--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
4241
4242 Additional image properties supported are:
4243
4244 `:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
4245
4246 SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
4247 name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
4248 name.
4249
4250 XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
4251 add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
4252
4253 The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
4254 to display compressed images.
4255
4256 **** PBM, image type `pbm'
4257
4258 PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
4259 mono images are supported. Additional image properties supported for
4260 mono images are:
4261
4262 `:foreground FG'
4263
4264 FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil
4265 meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's foreground color.
4266
4267 `:background FG'
4268
4269 BG must be a string specifying the image background color, or nil
4270 meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's background color.
4271
4272 **** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
4273
4274 Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
4275 package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
4276 properties defined.
4277
4278 **** TIFF, image type `tiff'
4279
4280 Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
4281 package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
4282 properties defined.
4283
4284 **** GIF, image type `gif'
4285
4286 Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
4287 `libungif-4.1.0', or later.
4288
4289 Additional image properties supported are:
4290
4291 `:index INDEX'
4292
4293 INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
4294 multi-image GIF file. An error is signaled if INDEX is too large.
4295
4296 This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
4297 For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
4298 at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
4299 every 0.1 seconds.
4300
4301 (defun show-anim (file max)
4302 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
4303 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
4304
4305 (defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
4306 (when (= idx max)
4307 (setq idx 0))
4308 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
4309 (save-excursion
4310 (set-buffer buffer)
4311 (goto-char (point-min))
4312 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
4313 (insert-image img "x"))
4314 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
4315
4316 **** PNG, image type `png'
4317
4318 Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
4319 package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
4320 properties defined.
4321
4322 **** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
4323
4324 Additional image properties supported are:
4325
4326 `:pt-width WIDTH'
4327
4328 WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
4329 integer. This is a required property.
4330
4331 `:pt-height HEIGHT'
4332
4333 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
4334 must be a integer. This is an required property.
4335
4336 `:bounding-box BOX'
4337
4338 BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
4339 the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
4340 files. This is an required property.
4341
4342 Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
4343 lisp/gs.el.
4344
4345 *** Lisp interface.
4346
4347 The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
4348 which are supported in the current configuration.
4349
4350 Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
4351 they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
4352 The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
4353 manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
4354 images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
4355
4356 *** Simplified image API, image.el
4357
4358 The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
4359 creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
4360 can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
4361 define an image based on available image types. The functions
4362 `put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
4363 buffer.
4364
4365 ** Display margins.
4366
4367 Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
4368 and images.
4369
4370 To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
4371 `left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
4372 `set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
4373 obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
4374 `right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
4375 the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
4376 of the display margins.
4377
4378 You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
4379 containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
4380 one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
4381 string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
4382 in this file).
4383
4384 ** Help display
4385
4386 Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
4387 moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
4388 `help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
4389 that have a `help-echo' property.
4390
4391 If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
4392 is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
4393 the window in which the help was found.
4394
4395 If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
4396 `help-echo' text property was found.
4397
4398 If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
4399 POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
4400
4401 If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
4402 the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
4403 mouse.
4404
4405 If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
4406 string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
4407
4408 For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
4409 determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
4410 property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
4411 For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
4412 used as help string.
4413
4414 The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
4415 the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
4416 causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
4417
4418 ** Vertical fractional scrolling.
4419
4420 The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
4421 This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
4422
4423 The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
4424 scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
4425 The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
4426 scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
4427 used.
4428
4429 (global-set-key [A-down]
4430 #'(lambda ()
4431 (interactive)
4432 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
4433 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
4434 (global-set-key [A-up]
4435 #'(lambda ()
4436 (interactive)
4437 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
4438 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
4439
4440 ** New hook `fontification-functions'.
4441
4442 Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
4443 when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
4444 variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
4445 is called with one argument, POS.
4446
4447 At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
4448 characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
4449 as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
4450 property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
4451 `fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
4452
4453 ** Tool bar support.
4454
4455 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
4456 parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
4457 controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
4458 suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
4459 `auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
4460 automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
4461
4462 *** Tool bar item definitions
4463
4464 Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
4465 `tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
4466 where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
4467
4468 CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
4469 evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
4470 the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
4471 property (see below).
4472
4473 BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
4474 binding are currently ignored.
4475
4476 The following properties are recognized:
4477
4478 `:enable FORM'.
4479
4480 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
4481 or disabled.
4482
4483 `:visible FORM'
4484
4485 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
4486
4487 `:filter FUNCTION'
4488
4489 FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
4490 FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
4491 used instead of BINDING to display this item.
4492
4493 `:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
4494
4495 TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
4496 and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
4497
4498 `:image IMAGES'
4499
4500 IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
4501 image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
4502 meaning of each of the four elements:
4503
4504 Index Use when item is
4505 ----------------------------------------
4506 0 enabled and selected
4507 1 enabled and deselected
4508 2 disabled and selected
4509 3 disabled and deselected
4510
4511 If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
4512 algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
4513
4514 `:help HELP-STRING'.
4515
4516 Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
4517 is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
4518
4519 The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding
4520 toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used
4521 to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the
4522 menu bar.
4523
4524 The default bindings use a menu-item :filter to derive the tool-bar
4525 dynamically from variable `tool-bar-map' which may be set
4526 buffer-locally to override the global map.
4527
4528 *** Tool-bar-related variables.
4529
4530 If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
4531 resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
4532 than 1/4 of the frame's size.
4533
4534 If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
4535 raised when the mouse moves over them.
4536
4537 You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
4538 `tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
4539 pixels, or a pair of integers (X . Y) specifying horizontal and
4540 vertical margins . Default is 1.
4541
4542 You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
4543 `tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
4544
4545 *** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
4546
4547 You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
4548 a tool bar item. If
4549
4550 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
4551 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
4552 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
4553
4554 is the original tool bar item definition, then
4555
4556 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
4557
4558 makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
4559 item.
4560
4561 ** Mode line changes.
4562
4563 *** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
4564
4565 The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
4566 that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
4567 a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
4568
4569 1. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
4570 a `local-map' text property.
4571
4572 2. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
4573 that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
4574
4575 3. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
4576 is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
4577 `local-map' property.
4578
4579 The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
4580 properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
4581 example.
4582
4583 *** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
4584 evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
4585
4586 *** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
4587 variable mode-line-format to nil.
4588
4589 *** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
4590
4591 This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
4592 `header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
4593 completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
4594 `default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
4595 line.
4596
4597 The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
4598 `header-line'.
4599
4600 The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
4601 position in the header-line.
4602
4603 ** Text property `display'
4604
4605 The `display' text property is used to insert images into text,
4606 replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is
4607 also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of
4608 the `display' property should be a display specification, as described
4609 below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
4610
4611 *** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas
4612
4613 To replace the text having the `display' property with some other
4614 text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'.
4615
4616 If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left
4617 marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in
4618 the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING
4619 is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
4620 simpler form STRING as property value.
4621
4622 *** Variable width and height spaces
4623
4624 To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
4625 specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
4626 `(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
4627 area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
4628 marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
4629 displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
4630 simpler form STRETCH as property value.
4631
4632 The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
4633 PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
4634 properties described below.
4635
4636 The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
4637 characters having the `display' property.
4638
4639 - :width WIDTH
4640
4641 Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
4642 character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
4643
4644 - :relative-width FACTOR
4645
4646 Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
4647 first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
4648 same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
4649 width of that character by FACTOR.
4650
4651 - :align-to HPOS
4652
4653 Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
4654 value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
4655
4656 Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
4657
4658 - :height HEIGHT
4659
4660 Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
4661 normal line height.
4662
4663 - :relative-height FACTOR
4664
4665 The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
4666 of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
4667
4668 - :ascent ASCENT
4669
4670 Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
4671 used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
4672 baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
4673 equal to 100.
4674
4675 You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
4676
4677 *** Images
4678
4679 A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
4680 . IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
4681 in the display, the characters having this display specification in
4682 their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
4683 the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
4684 `(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
4685 area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
4686 the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
4687 as display specification.
4688
4689 *** Other display properties
4690
4691 - (space-width FACTOR)
4692
4693 Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
4694 should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
4695 integer or float.
4696
4697 - (height HEIGHT)
4698
4699 Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
4700
4701 If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
4702 means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
4703 the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
4704 ``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
4705 a font is available counts as a step.
4706
4707 If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
4708 as tall as the frame's default font.
4709
4710 If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
4711 height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
4712
4713 Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
4714 `height' bound to the current specified font height.
4715
4716 - (raise FACTOR)
4717
4718 FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
4719 font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
4720 raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
4721 amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
4722 `height' subproperty.
4723
4724 *** Conditional display properties
4725
4726 All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
4727 has the form `(when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC applies
4728 only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated. During the
4729 evaluation, `object' is bound to the string or buffer having the
4730 conditional display property; `position' and `buffer-position' are
4731 bound to the position within `object' and the buffer position where
4732 the display property was found, respectively. Both positions can be
4733 different when object is a string.
4734
4735 The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
4736 `(when t . SPEC)'.
4737
4738 ** New menu separator types.
4739
4740 Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
4741 item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
4742 treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
4743 to specify other menu separator types.
4744
4745 - `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
4746
4747 No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
4748 separator occurs.
4749
4750 - `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
4751
4752 A single line in the menu's foreground color.
4753
4754 - `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
4755
4756 A double line in the menu's foreground color.
4757
4758 - `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
4759
4760 A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4761
4762 - `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
4763
4764 A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4765
4766 - `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
4767
4768 A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the form
4769 displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
4770
4771 - `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
4772
4773 A single line with 3D raised appearance.
4774
4775 - `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
4776
4777 A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
4778
4779 - `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
4780
4781 A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
4782
4783 - `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
4784
4785 Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4786
4787 - `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
4788
4789 Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
4790
4791 - `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
4792
4793 Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4794
4795 - `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
4796
4797 Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
4798
4799 Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
4800 the corresponding single-line separators.
4801
4802 ** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
4803
4804 The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
4805 `scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
4806 Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
4807 that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
4808 default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
4809 default background is the background color of the frame, and the
4810 default foreground is black.
4811
4812 The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
4813 (class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
4814 `ScrollBarBackground').
4815
4816 Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
4817 settings for scroll bar colors.
4818
4819 ** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
4820 display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
4821
4822 ** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
4823 starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
4824 on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
4825 line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
4826 the original window start.
4827
4828 ** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
4829 `hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
4830 now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
4831
4832 ** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
4833
4834 A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
4835 `window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
4836 windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
4837 other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
4838
4839 The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
4840 fixed-width and fixed-height.
4841
4842 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
4843
4844 A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
4845 fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
4846 window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
4847 change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
4848 temporarily to nil, for example
4849
4850 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
4851 (enlarge-window 10))
4852
4853 Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
4854 or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
4855
4856 ** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
4857 terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
4858 to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
4859 overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
4860 horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
4861 support a vertical-bar cursor).
4862
4863
4864
4865 * Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
4866
4867 ** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
4868 input.
4869
4870 ** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
4871
4872 ** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
4873
4874 ** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
4875 only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
4876 exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
4877 (e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
4878 (e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
4879
4880 ** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
4881 been added.
4882
4883
4884 * Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
4885
4886 ** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
4887
4888
4889
4890 * Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
4891
4892 ** Not new, but not mentioned before:
4893 M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
4894
4895 * Changes in Emacs 20.4
4896
4897 ** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
4898
4899 You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
4900 Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
4901 `.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
4902
4903 If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
4904 is the one that is used.
4905
4906 ** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
4907 the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
4908 Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
4909 separate from the command's regular output.
4910 Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
4911 says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
4912 In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
4913 the buffer name.
4914
4915 When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
4916 output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
4917 it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
4918 cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
4919
4920 ** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
4921 the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
4922 is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
4923 created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
4924
4925 ** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
4926 example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
4927 match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
4928 quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
4929
4930 ** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
4931 now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
4932 if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
4933 they never ignore case.
4934
4935 ** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
4936 under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
4937 applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
4938 of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
4939 just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
4940 convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
4941 part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
4942
4943 If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
4944 the same format that was used in the file before.
4945
4946 You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
4947 `inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
4948
4949 ** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
4950 renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
4951 This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
4952
4953 ** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
4954 The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
4955 buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
4956 your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
4957 is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
4958 end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
4959 Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
4960
4961 The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
4962 eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
4963 control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
4964 format. You can now customize these variables.
4965
4966 ** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
4967 filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
4968 filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
4969 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
4970
4971 ** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
4972 in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
4973 windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
4974
4975 ** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
4976 dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
4977 doesn't have any effect.
4978
4979 ** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
4980 not one per buffer.
4981
4982 ** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
4983 use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
4984 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
4985
4986 ** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
4987 To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
4988 `auto-show-mode' command.
4989
4990 ** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
4991 avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
4992 versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
4993 choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
4994 occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
4995
4996 ** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
4997 cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
4998
4999 ** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
5000 character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
5001 feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
5002
5003 ** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
5004 the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
5005 interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
5006 and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
5007
5008 ** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
5009
5010 The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
5011 that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
5012 one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
5013 codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
5014 set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
5015
5016 Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
5017 from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
5018
5019 IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
5020 equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
5021 a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
5022 `?' on other systems.
5023
5024 IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
5025 feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
5026 Unix.
5027
5028 Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
5029 current codepage when it starts.
5030
5031 ** Mail changes
5032
5033 *** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
5034 `mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
5035 appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
5036 non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
5037 MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
5038 headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
5039 latin-1:
5040
5041 MIME-version: 1.0
5042 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
5043 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
5044
5045 *** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
5046 default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
5047 default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
5048 sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
5049 buffer-file-coding-system.
5050
5051 You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
5052 sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
5053 mail.
5054
5055 *** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
5056 if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
5057 Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
5058 list of possible coding systems.
5059
5060 ** CC Mode changes
5061
5062 *** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
5063 modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
5064 longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
5065 docstring for details.
5066
5067 *** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
5068 symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
5069 found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
5070 prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
5071 lineup functions use this feature currently.
5072
5073 *** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
5074 "finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
5075
5076 *** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
5077 "catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
5078
5079 *** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
5080 from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
5081 symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
5082 c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
5083 anonymous classes.
5084
5085 *** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
5086 syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
5087
5088 *** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
5089 inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
5090 support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
5091 function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
5092
5093 *** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
5094 (i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
5095 brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
5096 c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
5097 (brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
5098
5099 *** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
5100
5101 *** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
5102
5103 *** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
5104 for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
5105
5106 *** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
5107
5108 *** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
5109 associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
5110 This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
5111 circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
5112 class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
5113
5114 ** Gnus changes.
5115
5116 *** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
5117 added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
5118 Gnus manual for the full story.
5119
5120 *** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
5121 before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
5122 group, which is created automatically.
5123
5124 *** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
5125 values.
5126
5127 *** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
5128
5129 *** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
5130 outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
5131
5132 *** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
5133 `C-u C-c C-c'.
5134
5135 *** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
5136
5137 *** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
5138 re-highlighting of the article buffer.
5139
5140 *** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
5141
5142 *** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
5143 Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
5144
5145 *** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
5146 `a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
5147
5148 *** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
5149 control over simplification.
5150
5151 *** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
5152
5153 *** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
5154 limit.
5155
5156 *** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
5157
5158 *** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
5159
5160 *** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
5161 If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
5162 rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
5163
5164 *** Canceling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
5165 `a' forces normal posting method.
5166
5167 *** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
5168 -- `W d'.
5169
5170 *** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
5171 to a non-nil value.
5172
5173 *** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
5174 where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
5175
5176 *** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
5177 has been added.
5178
5179 *** A history of where mails have been split is available.
5180
5181 *** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
5182
5183 *** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
5184 `gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
5185
5186 *** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
5187 `message-cite-original-without-signature'.
5188
5189 *** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
5190
5191 *** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
5192 been added.
5193
5194 *** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
5195 `gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
5196
5197 *** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
5198 updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
5199
5200 *** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
5201
5202 *** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
5203
5204 *** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
5205
5206 ** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
5207
5208 *** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
5209 options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
5210 nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
5211
5212 *** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
5213 TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
5214 of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
5215 TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
5216 can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
5217
5218 *** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
5219 All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
5220 but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
5221 the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
5222
5223 *** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
5224 the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
5225 buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
5226 mismatch.
5227
5228 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
5229
5230 *** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
5231 file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
5232
5233 *** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
5234 lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
5235 characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
5236 removed from the label.
5237
5238 *** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
5239 a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
5240
5241 *** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
5242 customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
5243
5244 *** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
5245 `reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
5246 expressions.
5247
5248 *** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
5249
5250 ** New/deleted modes and packages
5251
5252 *** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
5253 SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
5254
5255 *** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
5256 editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
5257 SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
5258
5259 *** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
5260 changes with a special face.
5261
5262 *** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
5263 this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
5264 Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
5265
5266 * MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
5267
5268 ** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
5269 This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
5270 conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
5271 and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
5272 check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
5273
5274 The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
5275 Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
5276 distribution when the config.bat script is run.
5277
5278 ** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
5279 MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
5280 controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
5281 directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
5282 Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
5283 on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
5284 string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
5285 program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
5286 printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
5287
5288 ** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
5289 output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
5290 available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
5291 input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
5292 temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
5293 program.
5294
5295 An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
5296 and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
5297 programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
5298 automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
5299 as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
5300 ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
5301
5302 ** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
5303 a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
5304 MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
5305 was not documented clearly before.
5306
5307 ** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
5308 This includes Tetris and Snake.
5309
5310 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
5311
5312 ** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
5313 return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
5314 They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
5315 meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
5316
5317 ** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
5318 WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
5319 and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
5320
5321 ** Changes in the file-attributes function.
5322
5323 *** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
5324 It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
5325
5326 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
5327 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
5328 integers.
5329
5330 ** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
5331 files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
5332 arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
5333 file names and attributes are returned.
5334
5335 ** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
5336 sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
5337 accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its attributes.
5338 It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
5339 returns the result.
5340
5341 ** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
5342 to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
5343
5344 ** New functions for base64 conversion:
5345
5346 The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
5347 into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
5348 performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
5349 optionally.
5350
5351 Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
5352 job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
5353
5354 **
5355 The new function process-running-child-p
5356 will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
5357 terminal to its own child process.
5358
5359 ** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
5360 when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
5361 to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
5362 itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
5363
5364 ** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
5365 be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
5366
5367 ** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
5368 :included is an alias for :visible.
5369
5370 easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
5371 easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
5372 to move or copy menu entries.
5373
5374 ** Multibyte editing changes
5375
5376 *** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
5377 an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
5378 make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
5379 work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
5380 char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
5381 (setq char (sref str idx)
5382 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
5383 The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
5384
5385 If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
5386 (say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
5387 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
5388
5389 *** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
5390 region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
5391 deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
5392
5393 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibited
5394
5395 This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
5396 across the boundary.
5397
5398 *** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
5399 `unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
5400 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
5401 contains 8-bit characters.
5402 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
5403 contains invalid characters.
5404
5405 *** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
5406 text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
5407 preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
5408 text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
5409 way.
5410
5411 *** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
5412 If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
5413 end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
5414 prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
5415
5416 *** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
5417 compose Thai characters in a string.
5418
5419 ** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
5420 argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
5421 for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
5422 menus should always use the third argument.
5423
5424 ** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
5425 read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
5426 arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
5427 input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
5428
5429 ** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
5430 of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
5431 programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
5432 inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
5433
5434 ** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
5435 the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
5436 returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
5437 echo area contents.
5438
5439 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
5440
5441 ** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
5442 NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
5443 requested feature cannot be loaded.
5444
5445 ** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
5446 foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
5447 means to clear out that attribute.
5448
5449 ** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
5450 gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
5451
5452 ** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
5453 read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
5454 unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
5455 end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
5456
5457 ** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
5458 the gap of the current buffer.
5459
5460 ** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
5461 to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
5462 current buffer.
5463
5464 ** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
5465 facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
5466 These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
5467 it back in after any modifications have been made.
5468
5469 * Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
5470
5471 ** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
5472 the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
5473 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
5474 directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
5475 subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
5476
5477 Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
5478 names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
5479 Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
5480 which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
5481 these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
5482
5483 Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
5484 starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
5485 time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
5486
5487 This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
5488 Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
5489 to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
5490 subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
5491 `.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
5492 results.
5493
5494 ** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
5495 GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
5496 that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
5497 fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
5498
5499 * Changes in Emacs 20.3
5500
5501 ** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
5502 including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
5503 it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
5504 perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
5505
5506 ** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
5507 specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
5508 region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
5509 further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
5510 command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
5511 within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
5512 are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
5513 region.
5514
5515 In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
5516 selective undo.
5517
5518 ** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
5519 unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
5520 buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
5521 effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
5522 Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
5523
5524 The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
5525 though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
5526 -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
5527 load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
5528
5529 ** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
5530 no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
5531 enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
5532 something that most users not do.
5533
5534 ** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
5535 operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
5536 The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
5537 applications.
5538
5539 C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
5540 pasting operations.
5541
5542 ** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
5543 setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
5544 like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
5545 printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
5546 `ps-printer-name'.
5547
5548 ** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
5549 minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
5550 any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
5551 except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
5552 incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
5553 hits a new word.
5554
5555 Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
5556 Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
5557 to be confused by TeX commands.
5558
5559 You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
5560 correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
5561 clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
5562 of various alternative replacements and actions.
5563
5564 Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
5565 the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
5566 corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
5567 alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
5568 flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
5569
5570 Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
5571 flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
5572
5573 ** Changes in input method usage.
5574
5575 Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
5576 the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
5577 respectively.
5578
5579 You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
5580
5581 If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
5582 of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
5583
5584 The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
5585 that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
5586
5587 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
5588
5589 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
5590
5591 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
5592 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
5593
5594 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
5595 given in the following case:
5596 o When you are using a complex input method.
5597 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
5598
5599 If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
5600 input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
5601 and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
5602 setting it to t is helpful.
5603
5604 The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
5605
5606 In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
5607 keys:
5608 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
5609 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
5610 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
5611 These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
5612 environment.
5613
5614 ** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
5615 names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
5616 minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
5617 get
5618
5619 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
5620
5621 which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
5622
5623 Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
5624 Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
5625
5626 ** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
5627 at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
5628 its owner and group.
5629
5630 ** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
5631 Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
5632
5633 ** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
5634 contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
5635
5636 ** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
5637 which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
5638 in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
5639 by the left edge of the rectangle.
5640
5641 ** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
5642 increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
5643 C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
5644 for writing keyboard macros.
5645
5646 ** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
5647 files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
5648 frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
5649 the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
5650 additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
5651 info.
5652
5653 ** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
5654
5655 ** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
5656 query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
5657 contents only.
5658
5659 ** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
5660 confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
5661 the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
5662 says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
5663
5664 ** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
5665 non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
5666 literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
5667
5668 ** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
5669 now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
5670 Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
5671 inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
5672
5673 ** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
5674 failure if the command produces no output.
5675
5676 ** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
5677 manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
5678 the mouse.
5679
5680 ** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
5681 mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
5682 function and variable names.
5683
5684 ** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
5685 reading specific files. This has higher priority than
5686 file-coding-system-alist.
5687
5688 ** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
5689 t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
5690 converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
5691 the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
5692 according to the current fontset.
5693
5694 ** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
5695
5696 The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
5697 that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
5698 nonascii-insert-offset.
5699
5700 For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
5701 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
5702 nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
5703 characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
5704
5705 ** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
5706 an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
5707
5708 ** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
5709 letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
5710
5711 ** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
5712 are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
5713 command keys.
5714
5715 ** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
5716 user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
5717
5718 Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
5719 user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
5720 all variables that have documentation.
5721
5722 ** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
5723 shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
5724 that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
5725 minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
5726 it should show; the default is 20.
5727
5728 Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
5729 the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
5730 of your input.
5731
5732 ** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
5733 all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
5734 recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
5735 argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
5736 the customizable options which were changed since that version.
5737 Newly added options are included as well.
5738
5739 If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
5740 then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
5741 for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
5742
5743 This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
5744 Customize menu.
5745
5746 ** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
5747 the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
5748
5749 ** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
5750 buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
5751 invoked.
5752
5753 ** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
5754 that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
5755 The default is 1.
5756
5757 ** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
5758 syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
5759 new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
5760 (C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
5761 sensibly.
5762
5763 ** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
5764
5765 ** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
5766 value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
5767 two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
5768
5769 ** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
5770 reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
5771 for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
5772 every night.
5773
5774 ** Desktop changes
5775
5776 *** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
5777 the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
5778
5779 *** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
5780 and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
5781
5782 ** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
5783 read and post multi-lingual articles.
5784
5785 ** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
5786 doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
5787 be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
5788 outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
5789 the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
5790 made invisible again.
5791
5792 ** Mail reading and sending changes
5793
5794 *** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
5795 the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
5796 changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
5797 toggle.
5798
5799 *** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
5800 now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
5801 summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
5802 the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
5803 rmail-default-body-file.
5804
5805 *** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
5806 longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
5807 handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
5808
5809 *** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
5810 it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
5811 is evaluated to insert the signature.
5812
5813 *** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
5814 outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
5815 handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
5816 putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
5817 transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
5818 especially interested in trying feedmail.
5819
5820 feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
5821 feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
5822 provided by feedmail are:
5823
5824 **** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
5825 stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
5826 there is also a queue for draft messages
5827
5828 **** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
5829 be prompted for confirmation
5830
5831 **** does smart filling of address headers
5832
5833 **** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
5834 the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
5835 can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
5836
5837 **** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
5838 the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
5839 /usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
5840 function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
5841
5842 ** Dired changes
5843
5844 *** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
5845 files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
5846
5847 *** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
5848 run Dired on the directory name at point.
5849
5850 *** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
5851 files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
5852 for a specified regexp.
5853
5854 ** VC Changes
5855
5856 *** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
5857 conveniently.
5858
5859 *** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
5860 faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
5861 Dired.
5862
5863 VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
5864 directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
5865 listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
5866 currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
5867
5868 You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
5869 then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
5870 vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
5871 control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
5872 on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
5873
5874 All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
5875 is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
5876 `v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
5877 the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
5878 `vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
5879
5880 The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
5881 toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
5882 VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
5883 `* l', to mark all files currently locked.
5884
5885 Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
5886 ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
5887 command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
5888
5889 *** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
5890 file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
5891 session to resolve them.
5892
5893 Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
5894 resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
5895 contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
5896 uses as well).
5897
5898 *** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
5899 command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
5900 you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
5901 either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
5902 branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
5903 If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
5904 using ediff.
5905
5906 ** Changes in Font Lock
5907
5908 *** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
5909 are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
5910 use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
5911 unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
5912 compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
5913
5914 ** Frame name display changes
5915
5916 *** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
5917 frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
5918 raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
5919 when many frames are invisible or iconified.
5920
5921 *** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
5922 frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
5923 menu.
5924
5925 ** Comint (subshell) changes
5926
5927 *** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
5928 subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
5929 with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
5930
5931 *** There are new commands in Comint mode.
5932
5933 C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
5934 that is, the line after the last line you got.
5935 You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
5936
5937 C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
5938 send the current line together with the following line, when you send
5939 the following line.
5940
5941 C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
5942 which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
5943 previously sent input.
5944
5945 C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
5946 it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
5947 as the search string.
5948
5949 *** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
5950 automatically in compilation-mode windows.
5951
5952 ** C mode changes
5953
5954 *** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
5955 and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
5956 assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
5957 definition.
5958
5959 *** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
5960 (i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
5961 Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
5962 style is still the default however.
5963
5964 *** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
5965
5966 *** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
5967 are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
5968 them. They do not have key bindings by default.
5969
5970 *** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
5971 and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
5972
5973 *** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
5974 namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
5975
5976 *** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
5977 makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
5978
5979 *** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
5980 c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
5981
5982 *** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
5983 should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
5984 package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
5985 variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
5986
5987 ** Changes to hippie-expand.
5988
5989 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
5990 non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
5991 which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
5992
5993 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
5994 non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
5995 expanding dynamically.
5996
5997 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
5998 non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
5999
6000 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
6001 non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
6002 this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
6003 expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
6004
6005 *** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
6006
6007 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
6008
6009 *** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
6010 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
6011 automatic key generation. This replaces variable
6012 bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
6013 against the first word in the title.
6014
6015 *** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
6016 capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
6017 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
6018 lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
6019 lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
6020 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
6021
6022 *** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
6023 generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
6024 replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
6025 bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
6026
6027 ** Changes in vcursor.el.
6028
6029 *** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
6030 and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
6031 variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
6032 entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
6033 `vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
6034 in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
6035
6036 *** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
6037 Editing group once the package is loaded.
6038
6039 *** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
6040 generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
6041 vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behavior.
6042
6043 *** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
6044 vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
6045
6046 ** Ispell changes.
6047
6048 *** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
6049 buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
6050 are identified by syntax tables in effect.
6051
6052 *** Generic region skipping implemented.
6053 A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
6054 and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
6055 defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
6056 include:
6057
6058 o URLs are automatically skipped
6059 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
6060
6061 *** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
6062
6063 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
6064
6065 RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
6066 large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
6067 re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
6068 section `Optimizations' in the manual.
6069
6070 *** New recursive parser.
6071
6072 The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
6073 entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
6074 recursive parser scans the individual files.
6075
6076 *** Parsing only part of a document.
6077
6078 Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
6079 partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
6080 the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
6081
6082 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
6083
6084 *** Storing parsing information in a file.
6085
6086 This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
6087
6088 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
6089
6090 *** Using multiple selection buffers
6091
6092 If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
6093 for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
6094
6095 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
6096
6097 *** References to external documents.
6098
6099 The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
6100 documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
6101 documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
6102 macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
6103 RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
6104 the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
6105 The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
6106
6107 *** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
6108
6109 The built-in command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
6110 and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
6111
6112 Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
6113 the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
6114
6115 *** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
6116
6117 The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
6118 buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
6119
6120 *** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
6121
6122 The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
6123 contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
6124 `reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
6125 have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
6126 enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
6127 at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
6128 more.
6129
6130 *** Support for the varioref package
6131
6132 The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
6133
6134 *** New hooks
6135
6136 Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
6137 and citations are created. These hooks are
6138 `reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
6139 `reftex-format-cite-function'.
6140
6141 *** Citations outside LaTeX
6142
6143 The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
6144 a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
6145
6146 *** Short context is no longer fontified.
6147
6148 The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
6149 fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
6150 fontified, use
6151
6152 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
6153
6154 ** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
6155 With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
6156 the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
6157 directories that contain the same file name.
6158
6159 Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
6160 Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
6161 file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
6162 Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
6163 have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
6164 names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
6165 directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
6166 directory.
6167
6168 ** New modes and packages
6169
6170 *** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
6171 It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
6172 it, but some do not.
6173
6174 *** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
6175 code.
6176
6177 *** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
6178 current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
6179 around in a buffer.
6180
6181 Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
6182
6183 *** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
6184 uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
6185 be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
6186 established system of notation similar to Chess.
6187
6188 *** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
6189 documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
6190 guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
6191
6192 *** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
6193 available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
6194 system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
6195 simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
6196 functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
6197 the like.
6198
6199 *** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
6200 identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
6201
6202 *** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
6203 within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
6204 used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
6205 the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
6206
6207 *** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
6208
6209 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
6210 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
6211 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
6212 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
6213 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
6214 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
6215 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
6216 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
6217 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
6218 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
6219 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
6220
6221 Platform-specific modes:
6222
6223 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
6224 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
6225 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
6226 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
6227 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
6228 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
6229 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
6230 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
6231 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
6232
6233 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
6234
6235 ** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
6236 use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
6237 That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
6238 Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
6239
6240 Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
6241 you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
6242 consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
6243
6244 ** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
6245 and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
6246 specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
6247 searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
6248
6249 ** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
6250 multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
6251 character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
6252 environment.
6253
6254 ** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
6255 take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
6256 string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
6257 current input method for reading this one event.
6258
6259 ** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
6260 now control whether to output certain characters as
6261 backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
6262 non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
6263 characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
6264 in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
6265
6266 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
6267
6268 ** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
6269 of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
6270
6271 ** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
6272 in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
6273 always increases point by 1.
6274
6275 The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
6276 considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
6277
6278 See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
6279
6280 ** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
6281 Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
6282 default value changed. For example,
6283
6284 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
6285 :type 'integer
6286 :group 'foo
6287 :version "20.3")
6288
6289 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
6290 :version "20.3")
6291
6292 If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
6293 default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
6294 is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
6295 `:version' in the top level group.
6296
6297 This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
6298
6299 ** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
6300 starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
6301
6302 However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
6303 symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
6304 support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
6305 to themselves.
6306
6307 If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
6308 this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
6309 values whatever.
6310
6311 ** There is a new debugger command, R.
6312 It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
6313 in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
6314
6315 ** Frame-local variables.
6316
6317 You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
6318 the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
6319 local bindings for that variable.
6320
6321 These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
6322 frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
6323 modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
6324 parameter name.
6325
6326 Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
6327 Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
6328 active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
6329 that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
6330
6331 It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
6332 clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
6333 very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
6334 through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
6335
6336 ** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
6337 "symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
6338 evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
6339 makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
6340 See the documentation in sregex.el.
6341
6342 ** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
6343 is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
6344 parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
6345 The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
6346
6347 ** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
6348 If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
6349
6350 ** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
6351 known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
6352 define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
6353
6354 ** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
6355 when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
6356 it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
6357 history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
6358
6359 The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
6360 return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
6361 empty input.
6362
6363 ** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
6364 for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
6365 `iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
6366 Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
6367 `read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
6368
6369 ** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
6370 echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
6371 a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
6372 default password to use if the user enters nothing.
6373
6374 ** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
6375 specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
6376 function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
6377 place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
6378 non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
6379
6380 ** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
6381 If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
6382 up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
6383 end of the window, even if this requires computation.
6384
6385 ** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
6386 which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
6387 If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
6388
6389 ** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
6390 holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
6391 was directed to display this buffer.
6392
6393 ** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
6394 with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
6395 describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
6396 other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
6397 set-window-configuration.
6398
6399 ** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
6400 window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
6401 positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
6402 windows and the choice of buffers to display.
6403
6404 ** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
6405 override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
6406 look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
6407
6408 If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
6409 non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
6410 map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
6411
6412 minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
6413 and it is meant to be set by major modes.
6414
6415 ** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
6416 except that it discards all text properties from the result.
6417
6418 ** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
6419 USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
6420 floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
6421
6422 ** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
6423 to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
6424 in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
6425 it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
6426
6427 ** Menu changes
6428
6429 *** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
6430 keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
6431 better supported.
6432
6433 The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
6434 a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
6435 you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
6436 can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
6437 then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
6438
6439 *** A new format for menu items is supported.
6440
6441 In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
6442 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
6443 defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
6444 starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
6445
6446 The format is:
6447 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
6448 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
6449 where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
6450 string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
6451 The supported properties include
6452
6453 :enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
6454 item is enabled.
6455 :visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
6456 item should appear in the menu.
6457 :filter FILTER-FN
6458 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
6459 which will be REAL-BINDING.
6460 It should return a binding to use instead.
6461 :keys DESCRIPTION
6462 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
6463 binding for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
6464 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
6465 :key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
6466 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
6467 keyboard binding.
6468 :key-sequence nil
6469 This means that the command normally has no
6470 keyboard equivalent.
6471 :help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
6472 :button (TYPE . SELECTED)
6473 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
6474 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
6475 value says whether this button is currently selected.
6476
6477 Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
6478 Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
6479
6480 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
6481
6482 ** New event types
6483
6484 *** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
6485 mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
6486 corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
6487 which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
6488
6489 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
6490
6491 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
6492 same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
6493 indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
6494 negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
6495 the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
6496 forward, away from the user.
6497
6498 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
6499
6500 *** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
6501 files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
6502 and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
6503 filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
6504 loaded into Emacs. The format is:
6505
6506 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
6507
6508 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
6509 same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
6510 that were dragged and dropped.
6511
6512 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
6513
6514 ** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
6515
6516 *** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
6517 any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
6518 to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
6519
6520 *** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
6521 can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
6522 that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
6523
6524 *** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
6525 in Emacs 19 and before.
6526
6527 The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
6528 The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
6529
6530 *** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
6531 buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
6532 unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
6533 representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
6534
6535 This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
6536 as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
6537 viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
6538 one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
6539 will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
6540
6541 This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
6542 representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
6543 (including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
6544 consistent with the new representation.
6545
6546 *** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
6547 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
6548 about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
6549 however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
6550
6551 The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
6552 nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
6553 using the table nonascii-translation-table.
6554
6555 *** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
6556 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
6557 representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
6558
6559 The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
6560 loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
6561 is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
6562
6563 *** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
6564 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
6565
6566 *** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
6567 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
6568
6569 *** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
6570 portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
6571 so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
6572 You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
6573
6574 *** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
6575 it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
6576
6577 *** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
6578 convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
6579 buffer or string being searched.
6580
6581 One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
6582 [...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
6583 searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
6584 searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
6585 obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
6586 you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
6587 expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
6588
6589 *** Structure of coding system changed.
6590
6591 All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
6592 by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
6593 which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
6594 as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
6595 vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
6596 your own alias name of a coding system by the function
6597 define-coding-system-alias.
6598
6599 The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
6600 the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
6601 access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
6602 pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
6603 character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
6604 safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
6605 'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
6606 `iso-8859-1'.
6607
6608 Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
6609 The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
6610 coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
6611 (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
6612
6613 Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
6614 also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
6615 are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
6616 the other character sets and read it back correctly.
6617
6618 *** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
6619 proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
6620 This function requires a user interaction.
6621
6622 *** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
6623 find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
6624 select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
6625 systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
6626 a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
6627 select-safe-coding-system.
6628
6629 *** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
6630 decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
6631 last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
6632 was done.
6633
6634 *** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
6635 used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
6636 coding systems used by some specific language environment.
6637
6638 *** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
6639 return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
6640 characters are found, they now return a list of single element
6641 `undecided' or its subsidiaries.
6642
6643 *** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
6644 coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
6645 coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
6646 converted.
6647
6648 *** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
6649 coding system for communicating with other X clients.
6650
6651 *** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
6652 character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
6653 character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
6654 each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
6655 either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
6656 range of characters.
6657
6658 *** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
6659 Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
6660
6661 *** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
6662 in the current buffer at position POS.
6663
6664 *** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
6665 input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
6666 function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
6667 character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
6668 event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
6669 binding input-method-function to nil.
6670
6671 The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
6672 method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
6673 input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
6674 the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
6675 not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
6676
6677 The input method function is not called when reading the second and
6678 subsequent events of a key sequence.
6679
6680 *** You can customize any language environment by using
6681 set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
6682
6683 The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
6684 customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
6685 instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
6686 environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
6687 exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
6688
6689 * Changes in Emacs 20.1
6690
6691 ** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
6692 options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
6693 at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
6694 tree structure.
6695
6696 M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
6697 user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
6698
6699 With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
6700 session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
6701 in your .emacs file.)
6702
6703 ** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
6704 You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
6705
6706 ** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
6707 This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
6708
6709 ** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
6710 immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
6711 kills the region.
6712
6713 The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
6714 delete the character before point, as usual.
6715
6716 ** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
6717 on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
6718 by setting search-highlight to nil.)
6719
6720 ** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
6721 insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
6722 the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
6723 onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
6724 history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
6725 past.)
6726
6727 ** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
6728 This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
6729 in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
6730 TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
6731 makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
6732
6733 As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
6734 and is an alias for it.
6735
6736 If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
6737 use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
6738
6739 ** Scrolling changes
6740
6741 *** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
6742 position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
6743
6744 In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
6745 on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
6746 where it started.
6747
6748 *** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
6749 move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
6750 screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
6751 does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
6752
6753 *** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
6754 top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
6755 comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
6756 recenters the window.
6757
6758 ** International character set support (MULE)
6759
6760 Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
6761 including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
6762 Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
6763 Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
6764 features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
6765 MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
6766
6767 Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
6768 coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
6769 character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
6770 variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
6771 into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
6772
6773 Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
6774 generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
6775 supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
6776 language, to make it possible to type them.
6777
6778 The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
6779 character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
6780
6781 The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
6782 to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
6783
6784 You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
6785
6786 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
6787
6788 Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
6789 characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
6790 argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
6791 already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
6792 characters for their work until they want to change.
6793
6794 *** Input methods
6795
6796 An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
6797 specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
6798 has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
6799 the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
6800 support several input methods.
6801
6802 The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
6803 another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
6804 work.
6805
6806 A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
6807 characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
6808 composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
6809 consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
6810 sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
6811 letter.
6812
6813 The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
6814 by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
6815 First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
6816 marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
6817 mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
6818
6819 None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
6820 they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
6821 phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
6822 converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
6823
6824 Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
6825 word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
6826 typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
6827 the first guess is wrong.
6828
6829 *** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
6830 turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
6831
6832 If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
6833 byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
6834 they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
6835 the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
6836
6837 However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
6838 use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
6839 includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
6840 translate automatically to and from either one.
6841
6842 *** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
6843
6844 Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
6845 file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
6846 sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
6847 what you want.
6848
6849 If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
6850 example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
6851 system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
6852 multibyte characters in that buffer.
6853
6854 If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
6855 character conversion as well.
6856
6857 *** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
6858
6859 A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
6860 Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
6861 requires using many fonts.
6862
6863 Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
6864 collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
6865
6866 A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
6867 the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
6868 have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
6869 you would use a font.
6870
6871 If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
6872 specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
6873 display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
6874
6875 The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
6876 (that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
6877 characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
6878 or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
6879 and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
6880
6881 *** Defining fontsets.
6882
6883 Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
6884 chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
6885 with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
6886
6887 Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
6888 of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
6889 `fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
6890 standard fontset are created automatically.
6891
6892 If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
6893 argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
6894 FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
6895 with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
6896 name is `fontset-startup'.
6897
6898 Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
6899 The resource value should have this form:
6900 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
6901 FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
6902 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
6903 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
6904 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
6905 The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
6906 of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
6907 CHARSET-NAME should be the name of a character set, and FONT-NAME
6908 should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
6909
6910 Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
6911 last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
6912 You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
6913
6914 For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
6915 font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
6916 following resource,
6917 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
6918 the font for ASCII is generated as below:
6919 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
6920 Here is the substitution rule:
6921 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
6922 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
6923 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
6924 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
6925 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
6926
6927 The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
6928 fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
6929 that function explicitly to create a fontset.
6930
6931 With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
6932 like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
6933 name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
6934 fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
6935 fontsets.
6936
6937 *** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
6938 defaults for a particular choice of language.
6939
6940 Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
6941 method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
6942 visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
6943 already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
6944 language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
6945 system for new files that you create.
6946
6947 It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
6948 set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
6949 whole Emacs session.
6950
6951 For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
6952 chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
6953 with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
6954
6955 *** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
6956 specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
6957 specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
6958 the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
6959 coding systems that Emacs supports.
6960
6961 *** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
6962 lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
6963 This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
6964 After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
6965 is used for *the immediately following command*.
6966
6967 So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
6968 write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
6969
6970 If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
6971 then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
6972
6973 For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
6974 visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
6975
6976 *** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
6977 construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
6978 to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
6979 specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
6980 of the file.
6981
6982 *** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
6983 the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
6984 code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
6985 translated into that character code.
6986
6987 This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
6988 various countries to support the languages of those countries.
6989
6990 By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
6991
6992 *** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
6993 the coding system for keyboard input.
6994
6995 Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
6996 with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
6997 some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
6998
6999 By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
7000
7001 Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
7002 input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
7003 translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
7004 to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
7005 designed to work with terminals.
7006
7007 *** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
7008 specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
7009 This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
7010 has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
7011 translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
7012 in the corresponding buffer.
7013
7014 By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
7015
7016 *** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
7017 to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
7018 It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
7019
7020 *** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
7021 an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
7022 command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
7023 want to use.
7024
7025 C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
7026 method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
7027
7028 *** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
7029 layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
7030 remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
7031 which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
7032
7033 *** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
7034 the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
7035 related information.
7036
7037 *** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
7038 HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
7039 scripts.
7040
7041 *** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
7042 information about the support for a particular language.
7043 You specify the language as an argument.
7044
7045 *** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
7046 the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
7047 first dash.
7048
7049 A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
7050 (except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
7051 whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
7052 1 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
7053
7054 A alternativnyj (Russian)
7055 B big5 (Chinese)
7056 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
7057 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
7058 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
7059 E euc-japan (Japanese)
7060 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
7061 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
7062 K euc-korea (Korean)
7063 R koi8 (Russian)
7064 Q tibetan
7065 S shift_jis (Japanese)
7066 T lao
7067 T tis620 (Thai)
7068 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
7069 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
7070 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
7071 v viqr (Vietnamese)
7072 z hz (Chinese)
7073
7074 When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
7075 two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
7076 coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
7077 keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
7078
7079 *** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
7080 conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
7081
7082 When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
7083 into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
7084 rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
7085 Rmail files themselves.
7086
7087 *** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
7088 conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
7089
7090 Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
7091 for sending mail:
7092
7093 - If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
7094 - Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
7095 - Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
7096 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
7097 - Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
7098
7099 *** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
7100 to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
7101 Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
7102 translations.
7103
7104 ** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
7105 of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
7106 insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
7107 without any conversion.
7108
7109 ** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
7110 You can now specify any number of octal digits.
7111 RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
7112 any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
7113
7114 ** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
7115 functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
7116
7117 Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
7118 Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
7119
7120 Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
7121 mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
7122
7123 ** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
7124 complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
7125 in the buffer before point.
7126
7127 With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
7128 symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
7129 you are using.
7130
7131 With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
7132 just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
7133
7134 ** File locking works with NFS now.
7135
7136 The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
7137 in the same directory as FILENAME.
7138
7139 This means that collision detection between two different machines now
7140 works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
7141 can become a bottleneck.
7142
7143 The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
7144 does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
7145 create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
7146 file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
7147 rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
7148 so useful that the change is worth while.
7149
7150 When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
7151 are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
7152 collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
7153 tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
7154
7155 ** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
7156 it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
7157 show-paren-mode.
7158
7159 ** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
7160 selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
7161 delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
7162
7163 ** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
7164 within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
7165 complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
7166
7167 ** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
7168 it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
7169 set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
7170
7171 ** Changes in View mode.
7172
7173 *** Several new commands are available in View mode.
7174 Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
7175
7176 *** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
7177 view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
7178
7179 *** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
7180 previous state.
7181
7182 *** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
7183 scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
7184
7185 *** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
7186 non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
7187 not just the selected window.
7188
7189 *** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
7190 read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
7191 turns View mode on or off.
7192
7193 *** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
7194 how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
7195 delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
7196
7197 ** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
7198 now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
7199
7200 ** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
7201 has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
7202 presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
7203 which version to compare with.
7204
7205 ** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
7206 blocks if a match is inside the block.
7207
7208 The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
7209 is outside the block. By customizing the variable
7210 isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
7211 shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
7212
7213 By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
7214 of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
7215 blocks, all of them or none.
7216
7217 ** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
7218 current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
7219 confirmation first.
7220
7221 ** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
7222 now changes the major mode according to that file name.
7223 However, the mode will not be changed if
7224 (1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
7225 (2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
7226 not suitable for ordinary files, or
7227 (3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
7228
7229 This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
7230
7231 However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
7232 these commands do not change the major mode.
7233
7234 ** M-x occur changes.
7235
7236 *** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
7237 it performs a case-sensitive search.
7238
7239 *** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
7240 if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
7241 using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
7242
7243 ** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
7244 in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
7245 window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
7246 that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
7247 buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
7248
7249 ** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
7250 after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
7251 appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
7252 come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
7253
7254 ** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
7255 selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
7256 buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
7257
7258 ** Outline mode changes.
7259
7260 *** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
7261
7262 *** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
7263
7264 ** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
7265 you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
7266 Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
7267 was already active.
7268
7269 The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
7270 unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
7271 get confused by it.
7272
7273 If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
7274 set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
7275
7276 ** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
7277
7278 *** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
7279 conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
7280 character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
7281 including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
7282
7283 The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
7284 mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
7285 copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
7286
7287 *** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
7288 are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
7289 values.
7290
7291 `dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
7292 case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
7293 `dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
7294 case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
7295
7296 ** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
7297 certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
7298 can be. The default value is 30.
7299
7300 ** Changes in Mail mode.
7301
7302 *** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
7303 Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
7304 composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
7305 `mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
7306 `sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
7307 behavior.
7308
7309 C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
7310 compose-mail-other-frame.
7311
7312 *** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
7313 the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
7314 replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
7315 buffer that shows the original message.
7316
7317 *** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
7318 with separator lines around the contents.
7319
7320 *** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
7321 in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
7322 definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
7323 need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
7324
7325 *** New features in the mail-complete command.
7326
7327 **** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
7328 for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
7329 controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
7330 Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
7331
7332 **** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
7333 to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
7334 /etc/passwd.
7335
7336 **** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
7337 to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
7338 /etc/passwd.
7339
7340 ** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
7341 special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
7342 directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
7343 reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
7344
7345 Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
7346 when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
7347 be taken to be magic.
7348
7349 ** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
7350 files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
7351 available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
7352
7353 M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
7354 (-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
7355
7356 ** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
7357 suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
7358
7359 In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
7360
7361 new key dired.el binding old key
7362 ------- ---------------- -------
7363 * c dired-change-marks c
7364 * m dired-mark m
7365 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
7366 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
7367 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
7368 * u dired-unmark u
7369 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
7370 * ? dired-unmark-all-files C-M-?
7371 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
7372 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
7373 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
7374 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
7375
7376 ** Rmail changes.
7377
7378 *** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
7379 saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
7380 chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
7381 each time you run it.
7382
7383 *** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
7384 whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
7385
7386 *** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
7387 messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
7388 means to move in the opposite direction.
7389
7390 *** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
7391 you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
7392
7393 *** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
7394 just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
7395 It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
7396 can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
7397 for output.
7398
7399 ** Gnus changes.
7400
7401 *** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
7402
7403 *** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
7404 Gnus.
7405
7406 *** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
7407 `and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
7408
7409 *** Article washing status can be displayed in the
7410 article mode line.
7411
7412 *** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
7413
7414 *** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
7415
7416 (setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
7417
7418 *** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
7419 are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
7420 `gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
7421
7422 *** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
7423
7424 *** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
7425
7426 *** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
7427 See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
7428
7429 *** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
7430 Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
7431 used to pick articles.
7432
7433 *** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
7434 another have been added.
7435
7436 `M-x gnus-change-server'
7437
7438 *** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
7439 generating lines in buffers.
7440
7441 *** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
7442 `C-M-_'.
7443
7444 *** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
7445
7446 *** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
7447
7448 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
7449
7450 *** Scores can be decayed.
7451
7452 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
7453
7454 *** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
7455 Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
7456
7457 *** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
7458 the native server.
7459
7460 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
7461
7462 *** A new command for reading collections of documents
7463 (nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `C-M-d'.
7464
7465 *** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
7466
7467 *** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
7468 even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
7469
7470 *** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
7471 (DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
7472
7473 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
7474 a group.
7475
7476 *** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
7477 sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
7478
7479 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
7480
7481 *** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
7482
7483 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
7484
7485 *** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
7486
7487 Use the `Y c' command.
7488
7489 *** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
7490
7491 *** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
7492
7493 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
7494
7495 *** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
7496 from incoming mail before saving the mail.
7497
7498 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
7499
7500 *** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
7501
7502 *** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
7503 the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
7504
7505 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
7506
7507 Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
7508 and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
7509 from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
7510 hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
7511 this issue.)
7512
7513 Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
7514 automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
7515 particular news group. This can be done by:
7516
7517 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
7518
7519 Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
7520 of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
7521 "XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
7522 system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
7523 for reading and posting).
7524
7525 CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
7526 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
7527 Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
7528 newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
7529 there.
7530
7531 Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
7532 default. Here are some of these default settings:
7533
7534 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
7535 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
7536 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
7537 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
7538 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
7539
7540 When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
7541 the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
7542
7543 ** CC mode changes.
7544
7545 *** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
7546 code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
7547 values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
7548 this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
7549 Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
7550 loaded.
7551
7552 If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
7553 Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
7554 style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
7555 share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
7556 c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
7557 must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
7558
7559 *** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
7560 of the current buffer.
7561
7562 *** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
7563 it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
7564 of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
7565
7566 *** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
7567 style that the Python developers like.
7568
7569 *** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
7570 This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
7571 just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
7572
7573 ** VC Changes [new]
7574
7575 *** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
7576 name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
7577 directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
7578
7579 This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
7580 master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
7581 developers.
7582
7583 You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
7584 RET in a buffer visiting that file.
7585
7586 *** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
7587 other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
7588 writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
7589 calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
7590
7591 *** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
7592 version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
7593
7594 ** Calendar changes.
7595
7596 *** A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or
7597 subclasses of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow
7598 you do this for the year of the selected date, or the
7599 following/previous years.
7600
7601 *** There is now support for the Baha'i calendar system. Use `pb' in
7602 the *Calendar* buffer to display the current Baha'i date. The Baha'i
7603 calendar, or "Badi calendar" is a system of 19 months with 19 days
7604 each, and 4 intercalary days (5 during a Gregorian leap year). The
7605 calendar begins May 23, 1844, with each of the months named after a
7606 supposed attribute of God.
7607
7608 ** ps-print changes
7609
7610 There are some new user variables and subgroups for customizing the page
7611 layout.
7612
7613 *** Headers & Footers (subgroup)
7614
7615 Some printer systems print a header page and force the first page to
7616 be printed on the back of the header page when using duplex. If your
7617 printer system has this behavior, set variable
7618 `ps-banner-page-when-duplexing' to t.
7619
7620 If variable `ps-banner-page-when-duplexing' is non-nil, it prints a
7621 blank page as the very first printed page. So, it behaves as if the
7622 very first character of buffer (or region) were a form feed ^L (\014).
7623
7624 The variable `ps-spool-config' specifies who is responsible for
7625 setting duplex mode and page size. Valid values are:
7626
7627 lpr-switches duplex and page size are configured by `ps-lpr-switches'.
7628 Don't forget to set `ps-lpr-switches' to select duplex
7629 printing for your printer.
7630
7631 setpagedevice duplex and page size are configured by ps-print using the
7632 setpagedevice PostScript operator.
7633
7634 nil duplex and page size are configured by ps-print *not* using
7635 the setpagedevice PostScript operator.
7636
7637 The variable `ps-spool-tumble' specifies how the page images on
7638 opposite sides of a sheet are oriented with respect to each other. If
7639 `ps-spool-tumble' is nil, ps-print produces output suitable for
7640 bindings on the left or right. If `ps-spool-tumble' is non-nil,
7641 ps-print produces output suitable for bindings at the top or bottom.
7642 This variable takes effect only if `ps-spool-duplex' is non-nil.
7643 The default value is nil.
7644
7645 The variable `ps-header-frame-alist' specifies a header frame
7646 properties alist. Valid frame properties are:
7647
7648 fore-color Specify the foreground frame color.
7649 Value should be a float number between 0.0 (black
7650 color) and 1.0 (white color), or a string which is a
7651 color name, or a list of 3 float numbers which
7652 correspond to the Red Green Blue color scale, each
7653 float number between 0.0 (dark color) and 1.0 (bright
7654 color). The default is 0 ("black").
7655
7656 back-color Specify the background frame color (similar to fore-color).
7657 The default is 0.9 ("gray90").
7658
7659 shadow-color Specify the shadow color (similar to fore-color).
7660 The default is 0 ("black").
7661
7662 border-color Specify the border color (similar to fore-color).
7663 The default is 0 ("black").
7664
7665 border-width Specify the border width.
7666 The default is 0.4.
7667
7668 Any other property is ignored.
7669
7670 Don't change this alist directly; instead use Custom, or the
7671 `ps-value', `ps-get', `ps-put' and `ps-del' functions (see there for
7672 documentation).
7673
7674 Ps-print can also print footers. The footer variables are:
7675 `ps-print-footer', `ps-footer-offset', `ps-print-footer-frame',
7676 `ps-footer-font-family', `ps-footer-font-size', `ps-footer-line-pad',
7677 `ps-footer-lines', `ps-left-footer', `ps-right-footer' and
7678 `ps-footer-frame-alist'. These variables are similar to those
7679 controlling headers.
7680
7681 *** Color management (subgroup)
7682
7683 If `ps-print-color-p' is non-nil, the buffer's text will be printed in
7684 color.
7685
7686 *** Face Management (subgroup)
7687
7688 If you need to print without worrying about face background colors,
7689 set the variable `ps-use-face-background' which specifies if face
7690 background should be used. Valid values are:
7691
7692 t always use face background color.
7693 nil never use face background color.
7694 (face...) list of faces whose background color will be used.
7695
7696 *** N-up printing (subgroup)
7697
7698 The variable `ps-n-up-printing' specifies the number of pages per
7699 sheet of paper.
7700
7701 The variable `ps-n-up-margin' specifies the margin in points (pt)
7702 between the sheet border and the n-up printing.
7703
7704 If variable `ps-n-up-border-p' is non-nil, a border is drawn around
7705 each page.
7706
7707 The variable `ps-n-up-filling' specifies how the page matrix is filled
7708 on each sheet of paper. Following are the valid values for
7709 `ps-n-up-filling' with a filling example using a 3x4 page matrix:
7710
7711 `left-top' 1 2 3 4 `left-bottom' 9 10 11 12
7712 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8
7713 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
7714
7715 `right-top' 4 3 2 1 `right-bottom' 12 11 10 9
7716 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5
7717 12 11 10 9 4 3 2 1
7718
7719 `top-left' 1 4 7 10 `bottom-left' 3 6 9 12
7720 2 5 8 11 2 5 8 11
7721 3 6 9 12 1 4 7 10
7722
7723 `top-right' 10 7 4 1 `bottom-right' 12 9 6 3
7724 11 8 5 2 11 8 5 2
7725 12 9 6 3 10 7 4 1
7726
7727 Any other value is treated as `left-top'.
7728
7729 *** Zebra stripes (subgroup)
7730
7731 The variable `ps-zebra-color' controls the zebra stripes grayscale or
7732 RGB color.
7733
7734 The variable `ps-zebra-stripe-follow' specifies how zebra stripes
7735 continue on next page. Visually, valid values are (the character `+'
7736 to the right of each column indicates that a line is printed):
7737
7738 `nil' `follow' `full' `full-follow'
7739 Current Page -------- ----------- --------- ----------------
7740 1 XXXXX + 1 XXXXXXXX + 1 XXXXXX + 1 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
7741 2 XXXXX + 2 XXXXXXXX + 2 XXXXXX + 2 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
7742 3 XXXXX + 3 XXXXXXXX + 3 XXXXXX + 3 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
7743 4 + 4 + 4 + 4 +
7744 5 + 5 + 5 + 5 +
7745 6 + 6 + 6 + 6 +
7746 7 XXXXX + 7 XXXXXXXX + 7 XXXXXX + 7 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
7747 8 XXXXX + 8 XXXXXXXX + 8 XXXXXX + 8 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
7748 9 XXXXX + 9 XXXXXXXX + 9 XXXXXX + 9 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
7749 10 + 10 +
7750 11 + 11 +
7751 -------- ----------- --------- ----------------
7752 Next Page -------- ----------- --------- ----------------
7753 12 XXXXX + 12 + 10 XXXXXX + 10 +
7754 13 XXXXX + 13 XXXXXXXX + 11 XXXXXX + 11 +
7755 14 XXXXX + 14 XXXXXXXX + 12 XXXXXX + 12 +
7756 15 + 15 XXXXXXXX + 13 + 13 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
7757 16 + 16 + 14 + 14 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
7758 17 + 17 + 15 + 15 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
7759 18 XXXXX + 18 + 16 XXXXXX + 16 +
7760 19 XXXXX + 19 XXXXXXXX + 17 XXXXXX + 17 +
7761 20 XXXXX + 20 XXXXXXXX + 18 XXXXXX + 18 +
7762 21 + 21 XXXXXXXX +
7763 22 + 22 +
7764 -------- ----------- --------- ----------------
7765
7766 Any other value is treated as `nil'.
7767
7768
7769 *** Printer management (subgroup)
7770
7771 The variable `ps-printer-name-option' determines the option used by
7772 some utilities to indicate the printer name; it's used only when
7773 `ps-printer-name' is a non-empty string. If you're using the lpr
7774 utility to print, for example, `ps-printer-name-option' should be set
7775 to "-P".
7776
7777 The variable `ps-manual-feed' indicates if the printer requires manual
7778 paper feeding. If it's nil, automatic feeding takes place. If it's
7779 non-nil, manual feeding takes place.
7780
7781 The variable `ps-end-with-control-d' specifies whether C-d (\x04)
7782 should be inserted at end of the generated PostScript. Non-nil means
7783 do so.
7784
7785 *** Page settings (subgroup)
7786
7787 If variable `ps-warn-paper-type' is nil, it's *not* treated as an
7788 error if the PostScript printer doesn't have a paper with the size
7789 indicated by `ps-paper-type'; the default paper size will be used
7790 instead. If `ps-warn-paper-type' is non-nil, an error is signaled if
7791 the PostScript printer doesn't support a paper with the size indicated
7792 by `ps-paper-type'. This is used when `ps-spool-config' is set to
7793 `setpagedevice'.
7794
7795 The variable `ps-print-upside-down' determines the orientation for
7796 printing pages: nil means `normal' printing, non-nil means
7797 `upside-down' printing (that is, the page is rotated by 180 degrees).
7798
7799 The variable `ps-selected-pages' specifies which pages to print. If
7800 it's nil, all pages are printed. If it's a list, list elements may be
7801 integers specifying a single page to print, or cons cells (FROM . TO)
7802 specifying to print from page FROM to TO. Invalid list elements, that
7803 is integers smaller than one, or elements whose FROM is greater than
7804 its TO, are ignored.
7805
7806 The variable `ps-even-or-odd-pages' specifies how to print even/odd
7807 pages. Valid values are:
7808
7809 nil print all pages.
7810
7811 `even-page' print only even pages.
7812
7813 `odd-page' print only odd pages.
7814
7815 `even-sheet' print only even sheets.
7816 That is, if `ps-n-up-printing' is 1, it behaves like
7817 `even-page', but for values greater than 1, it'll
7818 print only the even sheet of paper.
7819
7820 `odd-sheet' print only odd sheets.
7821 That is, if `ps-n-up-printing' is 1, it behaves like
7822 `odd-page'; but for values greater than 1, it'll print
7823 only the odd sheet of paper.
7824
7825 Any other value is treated as nil.
7826
7827 If you set `ps-selected-pages' (see there for documentation), pages
7828 are filtered by `ps-selected-pages', and then by
7829 `ps-even-or-odd-pages'. For example, if we have:
7830
7831 (setq ps-selected-pages '(1 4 (6 . 10) (12 . 16) 20))
7832
7833 and we combine this with `ps-even-or-odd-pages' and
7834 `ps-n-up-printing', we get:
7835
7836 `ps-n-up-printing' = 1:
7837 `ps-even-or-odd-pages' PAGES PRINTED
7838 nil 1, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 20
7839 even-page 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20
7840 odd-page 1, 7, 9, 13, 15
7841 even-sheet 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20
7842 odd-sheet 1, 7, 9, 13, 15
7843
7844 `ps-n-up-printing' = 2:
7845 `ps-even-or-odd-pages' PAGES PRINTED
7846 nil 1/4, 6/7, 8/9, 10/12, 13/14, 15/16, 20
7847 even-page 4/6, 8/10, 12/14, 16/20
7848 odd-page 1/7, 9/13, 15
7849 even-sheet 6/7, 10/12, 15/16
7850 odd-sheet 1/4, 8/9, 13/14, 20
7851
7852 *** Miscellany (subgroup)
7853
7854 The variable `ps-error-handler-message' specifies where error handler
7855 messages should be sent.
7856
7857 It is also possible to add a user-defined PostScript prologue code in
7858 front of all generated prologue code by setting the variable
7859 `ps-user-defined-prologue'.
7860
7861 The variable `ps-line-number-font' specifies the font for line numbers.
7862
7863 The variable `ps-line-number-font-size' specifies the font size in
7864 points for line numbers.
7865
7866 The variable `ps-line-number-color' specifies the color for line
7867 numbers. See `ps-zebra-color' for documentation.
7868
7869 The variable `ps-line-number-step' specifies the interval in which
7870 line numbers are printed. For example, if `ps-line-number-step' is set
7871 to 2, the printing will look like:
7872
7873 1 one line
7874 one line
7875 3 one line
7876 one line
7877 5 one line
7878 one line
7879 ...
7880
7881 Valid values are:
7882
7883 integer an integer specifying the interval in which line numbers are
7884 printed. If it's smaller than or equal to zero, 1
7885 is used.
7886
7887 `zebra' specifies that only the line number of the first line in a
7888 zebra stripe is to be printed.
7889
7890 Any other value is treated as `zebra'.
7891
7892 The variable `ps-line-number-start' specifies the starting point in
7893 the interval given by `ps-line-number-step'. For example, if
7894 `ps-line-number-step' is set to 3, and `ps-line-number-start' is set to
7895 3, the output will look like:
7896
7897 one line
7898 one line
7899 3 one line
7900 one line
7901 one line
7902 6 one line
7903 one line
7904 one line
7905 9 one line
7906 one line
7907 ...
7908
7909 The variable `ps-postscript-code-directory' specifies the directory
7910 where the PostScript prologue file used by ps-print is found.
7911
7912 The variable `ps-line-spacing' determines the line spacing in points,
7913 for ordinary text, when generating PostScript (similar to
7914 `ps-font-size').
7915
7916 The variable `ps-paragraph-spacing' determines the paragraph spacing,
7917 in points, for ordinary text, when generating PostScript (similar to
7918 `ps-font-size').
7919
7920 The variable `ps-paragraph-regexp' specifies the paragraph delimiter.
7921
7922 The variable `ps-begin-cut-regexp' and `ps-end-cut-regexp' specify the
7923 start and end of a region to cut out when printing.
7924
7925 ** hideshow changes.
7926
7927 *** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
7928 C++, ; for lisp).
7929
7930 *** Support for java-mode added.
7931
7932 *** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
7933 in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
7934
7935 *** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the comments at
7936 the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
7937 way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
7938
7939 *** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
7940 robust and a lot faster.
7941
7942 *** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
7943
7944 *** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
7945 to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
7946 documentation for more details.
7947
7948 ** Changes in Enriched mode.
7949
7950 *** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
7951 filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
7952 of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
7953 use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
7954 the next time unless the fill-column is different.
7955
7956 *** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
7957 distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
7958 as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
7959 as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
7960
7961 ** Font Lock mode
7962
7963 *** Custom support
7964
7965 The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
7966 font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
7967 faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
7968 group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
7969 your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
7970 consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
7971
7972 You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
7973
7974 *** Maximum decoration
7975
7976 Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
7977 default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
7978 of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
7979 supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
7980 to get the old behavior.
7981
7982 *** New support
7983
7984 Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
7985
7986 Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
7987 support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
7988
7989 *** Configurable support
7990
7991 Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
7992 additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
7993 c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
7994 java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
7995 list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
7996 of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
7997 convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
7998
7999 Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
8000 way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
8001 it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
8002
8003 *** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
8004
8005 You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
8006 highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
8007 for any mode.
8008
8009 For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
8010
8011 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
8012
8013 in your ~/.emacs.
8014
8015 *** New faces
8016
8017 Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
8018 font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
8019 distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
8020 to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
8021
8022 *** Changes to fast-lock support mode
8023
8024 The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
8025 cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
8026 same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
8027
8028 *** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
8029
8030 The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
8031 according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
8032 the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
8033 non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
8034 refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
8035 the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
8036 Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
8037
8038 This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
8039 For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
8040 this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
8041 refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
8042 containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
8043 the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
8044
8045 As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
8046
8047 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
8048 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
8049 Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
8050 new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
8051
8052 If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
8053 settings.
8054
8055 ** Ada mode changes.
8056
8057 *** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
8058 If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
8059 procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
8060 you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
8061 stubs.
8062
8063 *** There are two new commands:
8064 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
8065 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
8066
8067 The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
8068 `ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
8069 `ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
8070
8071 *** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
8072 is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
8073 Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
8074
8075 *** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
8076 formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
8077 places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
8078 space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
8079
8080 ** Scheme mode changes.
8081
8082 *** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
8083 mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
8084 for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
8085 with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
8086 have any effect.
8087
8088 If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
8089 still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
8090 scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
8091 variables as buffer-local variables.
8092
8093 *** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
8094 Use M-x dsssl-mode.
8095
8096 ** Changes to the emacsclient program
8097
8098 *** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
8099 USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
8100 associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
8101 can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
8102
8103 *** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
8104 it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
8105 buffer in Emacs.
8106
8107 *** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
8108 use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
8109 ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
8110 option takes precedence.
8111
8112 ** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
8113 constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
8114 (in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
8115
8116 ** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
8117 which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
8118 the current defun.
8119
8120 ** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
8121 following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
8122
8123 ** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
8124 and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
8125 necessary).
8126
8127 ** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
8128 if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
8129 these register values no longer become completely useless.
8130 If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
8131 asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
8132 it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
8133
8134 ** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
8135 example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
8136 be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
8137 you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
8138
8139 You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
8140 variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
8141 file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
8142 revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
8143 only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
8144
8145 ** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
8146 since it applies only to the current frame.
8147
8148 ** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
8149 file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
8150 and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
8151
8152 This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
8153 multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
8154 variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
8155 tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
8156 instead of just the file you are editing.
8157
8158 ** RefTeX mode
8159
8160 RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
8161 and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
8162 different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
8163 multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
8164 turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
8165
8166 C-c ( reftex-label
8167 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
8168 knows which kind of label is needed.
8169
8170 C-c ) reftex-reference
8171 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
8172 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
8173
8174 C-c [ reftex-citation
8175 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
8176 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
8177
8178 C-c & reftex-view-crossref
8179 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
8180
8181 C-c = reftex-toc
8182 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
8183 can quickly jump to every section.
8184
8185 Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
8186 commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
8187 Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
8188 reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
8189 C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
8190
8191 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8192
8193 *** Info documentation is now available.
8194
8195 *** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
8196 both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
8197
8198 *** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
8199 bibtex-user-optional-fields.
8200
8201 *** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
8202 (use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
8203
8204 *** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
8205 entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
8206 appropriate functions.
8207
8208 *** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
8209 entries. They are bound by default to C-M-l and C-M-h.
8210
8211 *** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
8212 been cleaned.
8213
8214 *** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
8215 bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
8216
8217 *** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
8218 shall be delimited.
8219
8220 *** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
8221 bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
8222 bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
8223
8224 *** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
8225 field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
8226 prefixed with `ALT'.
8227
8228 *** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
8229 bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
8230 formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
8231 documentation).
8232
8233 *** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
8234 documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
8235 for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
8236
8237 *** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
8238 comma should be inserted at end of last field.
8239
8240 *** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
8241 alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
8242 signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
8243
8244 *** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
8245
8246 *** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
8247
8248 *** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
8249 from alien sources.
8250
8251 *** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
8252 to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
8253 crossref entries.
8254
8255 *** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
8256 region.
8257
8258 *** Added support for imenu.
8259
8260 *** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
8261 of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
8262 `compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
8263 `next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
8264
8265 *** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
8266 from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
8267
8268 ** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
8269
8270 ** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
8271
8272 ** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
8273 functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
8274 Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
8275 as an argument.
8276
8277 When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
8278 and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
8279
8280 ** browse-url changes
8281
8282 *** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
8283 Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
8284 (browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
8285 non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
8286 customization variables.
8287
8288 *** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
8289
8290 *** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
8291 lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
8292 (e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
8293
8294 ** Changes in Ediff
8295
8296 *** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
8297 pops up the Info file for this command.
8298
8299 *** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
8300 the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
8301 merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
8302 directories).
8303
8304 *** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
8305 and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
8306 files in the same directory.
8307
8308 *** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
8309 The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
8310 related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
8311
8312 ** Changes in Viper
8313
8314 *** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
8315 *** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
8316 instead of vip-.
8317 *** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
8318 *** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
8319 Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
8320 *** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
8321 *** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
8322 *** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
8323 color when Viper is in insert state.
8324 *** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
8325 Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
8326 viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
8327
8328 ** Etags changes.
8329
8330 *** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
8331 default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
8332 Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
8333 variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
8334 not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
8335
8336 *** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
8337
8338 *** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
8339 constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
8340
8341 *** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
8342 recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
8343 In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
8344
8345 *** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
8346 C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
8347 recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
8348 methods and protocols.
8349
8350 *** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
8351 .cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
8352 column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
8353 paragraph name.
8354
8355 *** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
8356 an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
8357 at least M times and as many as N times.
8358
8359 ** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
8360 in files has changed slightly.
8361
8362 With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
8363 time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
8364 This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
8365 with old time-stamp-format values.
8366
8367 In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
8368 (`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
8369 This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
8370 reasons.
8371
8372 In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
8373 natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
8374 fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
8375 (`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
8376 time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
8377 specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
8378
8379 Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
8380 case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
8381 truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
8382
8383 The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
8384 being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
8385 future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
8386 recommended now will continue to work then.
8387
8388 See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
8389 details.
8390
8391 ** There are some additional major modes:
8392
8393 dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
8394 m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
8395 meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
8396
8397 ** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
8398 copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
8399 into Emacs.
8400
8401 ** New Lisp packages include:
8402
8403 *** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
8404
8405 *** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
8406 be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
8407
8408 *** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
8409
8410 *** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
8411 in shell buffers.
8412
8413 *** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
8414 See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
8415 and `elint-defun'.
8416
8417 *** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
8418 meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
8419 ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
8420 strings or comments.
8421
8422 These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
8423 abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
8424 you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
8425 insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
8426 at these points.
8427
8428 *** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
8429 can visit them by short forms of their names.
8430
8431 *** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
8432 Emacs Lisp function at point.
8433
8434 *** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
8435
8436 *** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
8437 switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
8438
8439 *** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
8440
8441 *** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
8442
8443 *** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
8444
8445 *** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
8446 from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
8447
8448 *** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
8449 You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
8450 inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
8451 original place after inserting the copy.
8452
8453 *** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
8454 on the buffer.
8455
8456 You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
8457 velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
8458 (with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
8459
8460 Enable mouse-drag with:
8461 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
8462 -or-
8463 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
8464
8465 *** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
8466 mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
8467
8468 *** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
8469 It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
8470
8471 *** ogonek
8472
8473 The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
8474 Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
8475 platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
8476 TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
8477 ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
8478 prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
8479 instance) and vice versa.
8480
8481 To use this package load it using
8482 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
8483 Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
8484 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
8485 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
8486 The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
8487 ways of customization in `.emacs'.
8488
8489 *** Interface to ph.
8490
8491 Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
8492
8493 The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
8494 services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
8495 these servers.
8496
8497 *** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
8498
8499 *** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
8500 You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
8501 while the real cursor does not move.
8502
8503 *** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
8504 for visiting your favorite web sites.
8505
8506 *** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
8507 so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
8508
8509 ** movemail change
8510
8511 Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
8512 mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
8513 supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
8514 user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
8515
8516 This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
8517
8518 * Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
8519
8520 ** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
8521
8522 Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
8523 end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
8524 Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
8525 file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
8526 file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
8527
8528 To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
8529 C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
8530 coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
8531 specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
8532 LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
8533 save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
8534
8535 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
8536
8537 ** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
8538 Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
8539 vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
8540 Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
8541
8542 ** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
8543 to start with w32- instead of win32-.
8544
8545 In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
8546 don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
8547 "win".
8548
8549 ** Basic Lisp changes
8550
8551 *** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
8552 evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
8553
8554 *** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
8555 be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
8556 or by the user.
8557
8558 The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
8559
8560 *** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
8561
8562 (when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
8563 (unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
8564
8565 *** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
8566 usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
8567 its argument.
8568
8569 *** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
8570
8571 *** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
8572
8573 *** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
8574
8575 *** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
8576 error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
8577 include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
8578 `format' function.
8579
8580 *** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
8581 or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
8582 whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
8583
8584 *** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
8585 either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
8586 adding one of these suffixes.
8587
8588 *** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
8589 which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
8590 If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
8591
8592 We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
8593 because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
8594
8595 *** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
8596
8597 *** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
8598 You must load the `cl' library to define it.
8599
8600 *** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
8601 conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
8602
8603 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
8604
8605 BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
8606 BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
8607
8608 *** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
8609 choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
8610 restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
8611 works using `save-current-buffer'.
8612
8613 *** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
8614 write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
8615 of the last form.
8616
8617 *** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
8618 which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
8619 last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
8620 as the last form.
8621
8622 *** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
8623 characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
8624 matches.
8625
8626 For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
8627
8628 *** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
8629 with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
8630 Then it returns that string.
8631
8632 For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
8633
8634 (with-output-to-string
8635 (princ "The buffer is ")
8636 (princ (buffer-name)))
8637
8638 returns "The buffer is foo".
8639
8640 ** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
8641 is non-nil.
8642
8643 These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
8644 buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
8645 characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
8646
8647 *** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
8648 a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
8649
8650 Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
8651 character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
8652 Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
8653 position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
8654 characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
8655 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
8656
8657 ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
8658 Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
8659 non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
8660 characters".
8661
8662 The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
8663 through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
8664 "leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
8665 range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
8666 leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
8667
8668 *** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
8669 (forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
8670 multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
8671 character, which may be more than one buffer position.
8672
8673 This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
8674 always one buffer position, need to be changed.
8675
8676 However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
8677
8678 *** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
8679 because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
8680 have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
8681 the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
8682 guaranteed.
8683
8684 *** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
8685 between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
8686 character).
8687
8688 When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
8689
8690 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
8691 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
8692 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
8693 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
8694 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
8695
8696 *** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
8697
8698 *** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
8699 `length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
8700 more than the number of characters.
8701
8702 You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
8703 it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
8704 \xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
8705 is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
8706 follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
8707 newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
8708
8709 *** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
8710 and returns a string containing those characters.
8711
8712 *** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
8713 (sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
8714 counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
8715 character, sref signals an error.
8716
8717 *** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
8718 in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
8719 string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
8720
8721 *** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
8722 in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
8723 region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
8724
8725 *** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
8726 the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
8727 to a vector of the characters in it.
8728
8729 *** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
8730 of a string. You call it as follows:
8731
8732 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
8733
8734 This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
8735 STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
8736 This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
8737 Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
8738 it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
8739
8740 *** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
8741 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
8742
8743 *** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
8744 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
8745
8746 *** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
8747 to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
8748 not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
8749 which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
8750
8751 (truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
8752
8753 This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
8754
8755 The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
8756 If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
8757 are not included in the resulting value.
8758
8759 The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
8760 at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
8761 WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
8762 is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
8763
8764 If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
8765 place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
8766 character extends across that column), then the padding character
8767 PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
8768 string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
8769 column START-COLUMN.
8770
8771 *** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
8772 the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
8773 necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
8774 difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
8775 changed text, before the change.
8776
8777 *** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
8778 sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
8779 one character set for each script, not for each language.
8780
8781 **** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
8782
8783 **** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
8784
8785 **** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
8786 set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
8787
8788 **** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
8789 name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
8790 which identify the character within that character set.
8791
8792 **** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
8793 byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
8794 opposite of split-char.
8795
8796 **** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
8797 of all the characters between BEG and END.
8798
8799 **** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
8800 of all the characters in a string.
8801
8802 *** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
8803 and specifying coding systems.
8804
8805 **** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
8806 system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
8807 of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
8808 (Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
8809 and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
8810 as what to do about code conversion.)
8811
8812 **** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
8813 name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
8814
8815 **** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
8816 for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
8817 except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
8818
8819 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
8820 which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
8821 to match against a file name.
8822
8823 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
8824 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
8825 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
8826 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
8827 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
8828 specifies the coding system for encoding.
8829
8830 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
8831 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
8832
8833 **** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
8834 the coding system to use for network sockets.
8835
8836 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
8837 which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
8838 either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
8839 service names.
8840
8841 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
8842 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
8843 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
8844 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
8845 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
8846 specifies the coding system for encoding.
8847
8848 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
8849 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
8850
8851 **** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
8852 for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
8853 except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
8854 start the subprocess.
8855
8856 **** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
8857 systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
8858 when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
8859 (OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
8860 to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
8861
8862 **** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
8863 coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
8864 subprocess.
8865
8866 It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
8867 but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
8868 start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
8869 connection permanently or until overridden.
8870
8871 The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
8872 file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
8873 network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
8874 coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
8875 It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
8876 system for one operation at a time.
8877
8878 **** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
8879 files, subprocesses or network connections.
8880
8881 **** The function process-coding-system tells you what
8882 coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
8883 The value is a cons cell,
8884 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
8885 where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
8886 the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
8887 input to the subprocess.
8888
8889 **** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
8890 change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
8891
8892 ** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
8893 customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
8894 you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
8895
8896 You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
8897 variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
8898 information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
8899 legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
8900 customization.
8901
8902 Thus, instead of writing
8903
8904 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
8905 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
8906
8907 you would now write this:
8908
8909 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
8910 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
8911 :type 'boolean
8912 :group foo)
8913
8914 The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
8915 two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
8916 describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
8917 for a description of them.
8918
8919 The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
8920 should belong to. You define a new group like this:
8921
8922 (defgroup ispell nil
8923 "Spell checking using Ispell."
8924 :group 'processes)
8925
8926 The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
8927 group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
8928 but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
8929 to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
8930 second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
8931
8932 Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
8933 package should have just one group; a more complex package should
8934 have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
8935 package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
8936 first-level subgroups.
8937
8938 ** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
8939
8940 This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
8941 separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
8942
8943 ** easy-mmode
8944
8945 The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
8946 developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
8947 only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
8948 predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
8949 `easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
8950 `easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
8951
8952 ** Text property changes
8953
8954 *** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
8955 text property.
8956
8957 *** The new functions next-char-property-change and
8958 previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
8959 place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
8960 functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
8961 starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
8962
8963 If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
8964 LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
8965 of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
8966 position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
8967
8968 *** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
8969 value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
8970 is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
8971
8972 ** Changes in invisibility features
8973
8974 *** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
8975 hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
8976 is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
8977 should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
8978 would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
8979 make the overlay visible.
8980
8981 During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
8982 invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
8983 needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
8984 which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
8985 the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
8986 t when it should hide it.
8987
8988 *** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
8989
8990 Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
8991 invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
8992 and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
8993 Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
8994 manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
8995 Here is an example of how to do this:
8996
8997 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
8998 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
8999 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
9000 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
9001
9002 ...
9003 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
9004
9005 ...
9006 ;; When done with the overlays:
9007 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
9008 ;; Or respectively:
9009 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
9010
9011 ** Changes in syntax parsing.
9012
9013 *** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
9014 `parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
9015 obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
9016 `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
9017
9018 If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
9019 is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
9020 used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
9021
9022 When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
9023 character in the buffer is calculated thus:
9024
9025 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
9026 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
9027
9028 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
9029 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
9030 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
9031
9032 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
9033 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
9034 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
9035 determine the syntax type of the character.
9036
9037 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
9038 of the current buffer.
9039
9040 *** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
9041 value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
9042 for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
9043
9044 *** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
9045 and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
9046 only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
9047 character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
9048 another character with the same code (unless quoted).
9049
9050 These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
9051 text property.
9052
9053 *** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
9054 arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
9055 of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
9056
9057 *** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
9058 (and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
9059 element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
9060 nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
9061 string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
9062
9063 *** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
9064 syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
9065 `font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
9066
9067 ** Changes in face features
9068
9069 *** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
9070 if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
9071
9072 *** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
9073 of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
9074
9075 *** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
9076 set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
9077
9078 *** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
9079 set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
9080
9081 *** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
9082 by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
9083 and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
9084 the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
9085 overlay property).
9086
9087 This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
9088 arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
9089
9090 ** Changes in file-handling functions
9091
9092 *** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
9093 directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
9094 they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
9095 is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
9096
9097 This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
9098 begins with ~.
9099
9100 *** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
9101 it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
9102
9103 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
9104 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
9105
9106 *** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
9107 as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
9108
9109 *** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
9110 character code conversion as well as other things.
9111
9112 Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
9113 (formerly it did not).
9114
9115 *** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
9116 environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
9117
9118 *** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
9119 instead of constant strings.
9120
9121 *** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
9122 to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
9123 any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
9124
9125 substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
9126 in the same way as before.
9127
9128 *** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
9129 The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
9130 which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
9131
9132 *** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
9133 error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
9134 else, and returns nil.
9135
9136 *** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
9137 directory cannot be listed.
9138
9139 ** Changes in minibuffer input
9140
9141 *** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
9142 read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
9143 additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
9144 argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
9145 ways:
9146
9147 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
9148 It is available through the history command M-n.
9149
9150 *** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
9151 read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
9152 argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
9153 minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
9154 enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
9155
9156 In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
9157 argument in this way.
9158
9159 *** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
9160 from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
9161 minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
9162
9163 ** Echo area features
9164
9165 *** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
9166 echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
9167 minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
9168 after the echo area is cleared.
9169
9170 *** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
9171 in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
9172
9173 ** Keyboard input features
9174
9175 *** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
9176 set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
9177
9178 *** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
9179 received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
9180 by keyboard macros.
9181
9182 ** Frame-related changes
9183
9184 *** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
9185 creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
9186 hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
9187
9188 *** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
9189 the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
9190 has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
9191
9192 *** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
9193 selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
9194 value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
9195 in the selected frame.
9196
9197 *** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
9198 is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
9199 which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
9200
9201 ** X Windows features
9202
9203 *** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
9204 x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
9205 x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
9206
9207 *** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
9208 The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
9209
9210 *** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
9211 MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
9212 A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
9213
9214 If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
9215 it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
9216
9217 ** Subprocess features
9218
9219 *** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
9220 functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
9221 automatically.
9222
9223 *** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
9224 and returns the output from the command as a string.
9225
9226 *** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
9227 and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
9228
9229 ** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
9230 does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
9231
9232 ** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
9233 at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
9234 goes after the other menu items.
9235
9236 ** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
9237 of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
9238 around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
9239 are in use.
9240
9241 The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
9242 series of several changes--if that seems safe.
9243
9244 Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
9245 after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
9246 form.
9247
9248 ** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
9249 is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
9250 but its hook is still run.
9251
9252 ** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
9253 for errors that are handled by condition-case.
9254
9255 If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
9256 regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
9257 useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
9258
9259 This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
9260 are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
9261 filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
9262 warned.
9263
9264 ** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
9265 way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
9266
9267 ** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
9268 integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
9269 functions like display-time.
9270
9271 ** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
9272 name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
9273
9274 ** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
9275 can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
9276 is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
9277
9278 ** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
9279 if there is an error in compilation.
9280
9281 ** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
9282 switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
9283 argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
9284 they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
9285
9286 ** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
9287 Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
9288 the *scratch* buffer.
9289
9290 ** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
9291 The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
9292 where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
9293 e.g., in Font Lock mode.
9294
9295 ** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
9296 and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
9297 It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
9298
9299 ** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
9300 using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
9301 variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
9302 and compose-mail-other-frame.
9303
9304 ** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
9305 can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
9306 full name of the specified user will be returned.
9307
9308 ** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
9309 of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
9310 where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
9311 in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
9312 option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
9313 files at all.
9314
9315 ** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
9316 and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
9317 width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
9318 the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
9319
9320 For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
9321 minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
9322 with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
9323 is how %S normally pads to two positions.
9324
9325 ** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
9326
9327 ** imenu.el changes.
9328
9329 You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
9330 item from menu created by imenu.
9331
9332 An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
9333 #include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
9334 select one of those items.
9335
9336 * For older news, see the file ONEWS
9337
9338 ----------------------------------------------------------------------
9339 Copyright information:
9340
9341 Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
9342
9343 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
9344 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
9345 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
9346 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
9347
9348 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
9349 of this document, or of portions of it,
9350 under the above conditions, provided also that they
9351 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
9352
9353 Local variables:
9354 mode: outline
9355 paragraph-separate: "[ ]*$"
9356 end:

savannah-hackers-public@gnu.org
ViewVC Help
Powered by ViewVC 1.1.26